Sysmac cs1wscb41v1
Sysmac cs1wscb41v1
Sysmac cs1wscb41v1
W336-E1-09
SYSMAC
CS/CJ Series
CS1W-SCB@@-V1
Serial Communications Boards
CS1W-SCU@@-V1 and
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1
Serial Communications Units
OPERATION MANUAL
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
Serial Communications Boards and
Serial Communications Units
Operation Manual
Revised February 2008
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
!DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be property damage.
!WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be property damage.
!Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1999
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
3 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
7 Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
8 Functions Added in the Unit Version 1.3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
9 Functions Added in the Unit Version 1.2 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-1 Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1-3 Protocol Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1-4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1-5 System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1-6 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1-7 Comparison to Previous Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1-8 Selecting the Serial Communications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1-9 Basic Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
SECTION 2
Initial Settings and I/O Memory Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2-1 Component Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2-2 Data Exchange with the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2-3 I/O Memory Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3-1 Installing a Serial Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
3-2 Installing Serial Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
3-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
SECTION 4
Using Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4-1 Host Link Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4-2 Setup Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4-4 Communications Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4-5 Changes from Previous Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
4-6 Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
Using Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
5-1 Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5-2 Setup Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
5-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
5-4 Using Protocol Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5-5 Simple Backup Function (Backup of Protocol Macro Data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
5-6 Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
SECTION 6
Serial Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
6-1 Serial Gateway Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6-2 DM Area Allocations (Using Serial Gateway Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area in Serial Gateway Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
6-4 Using the Serial Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
6-5 Protocol Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
6-6 Serial Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
6-7 Conditions Requiring Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6-8 Communications Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
SECTION 7
No-protocol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
7-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
7-2 Allocation DM Area for No-protocol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7-4 Basic Operating Procedure in No-protocol Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
SECTION 8
Using 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
8-1 Overview of 1:N NT Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
8-2 Setup Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
SECTION 9
Using Modbus-RTU Slave Mode
(Unit Version 1.3 or Later). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
9-1 Modbus-RTU Slave System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
9-2 Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
9-3 Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
9-4 Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
9-5 Changes from Previous Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
9-6 Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10
Loopback Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10-1 Executing Loopback Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10-2 Setup Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
10-3 CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
11-1 Indicator Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
11-2 Status Area Error Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
11-3 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
11-4 Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
11-5 Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
11-6 Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Appendices
A Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
B CompoWay/F Master Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
C C-mode (Host Link) Command Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
D Host Link FINS Command Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
E Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
F E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
G E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
H E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
I E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
J E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
K ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
L K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
M V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
N 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
O Visual Inspection System Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
P V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Q Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
R Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749
ix
x
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the SYSMAC CS/CJ-series CS1W-SCB@@-V1
Serial Communications Boards and CS1W-SCU@@-V1 and CJ1W-SCU@@-V1 Serial Communica-
tions Units and includes the sections described on the next page.
The Serial Communications Boards are classified as Inner Boards and the Serial Communications
Unit is classified as a CPU Bus Unit.
Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table carefully and be sure you
understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate a Serial Communications
Board or Unit.
Name Cat. No. Contents
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series W336 Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, and Boards to perform serial communications with
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1 external devices, including the usage of standard
Serial Communications Boards and system protocols for OMRON products.
Serial Communications Unit Operation Manual (this
manual)
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series W341 Provides information on how to program and operate
CQM1H-PRO-E1, CQM1-PRO01-E, CS/CJ-series PLCs using a Programming Console.
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Consoles Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS-series CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1G/H- W339 Describes the installation and operation of the CS-
CPU@@-EV1 series PLCs.
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CJ-series W393 Describes the installation and operation of the CJ-
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1M-CPU@@, series PLCs.
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, W394 Describes the ladder diagram programming functions
CS1G/H-CPU@@H, and other functions supported by CS-series and CJ-
CJ1G-CPU@@-E, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H series PLCs.
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series CS1G/H-CPU@@H, CS1G/ W340 Describes the ladder diagram programming instruc-
H-CPU@@-EV1, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@, tions supported by CS-series and CJ-series PLCs.
CJ1M-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers
Instructions Reference Manual
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series W342 Describes the Host Link and FINS communications
CS1G-/H-CPU@@H, CS1G/H-CPU@@-E, CS1W- commands used with CS-series and CJ-series PLCs.
SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1W-CPU@@, CJ1W-SCU@@-V1
Communications Commands Reference Manual
SYSMAC WS02-CXPC1-E-V60 W446 Provides information on how to use the CX-Program-
CX-Programmer Operation Manual mer, a programming device that supports the CS-
series and CJ-series PLCs.
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E W344 Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create proto-
CX-Protocol Operation Manual col macros as communications sequences to com-
municate with external devices.
SYSMAC CS/CJ-series W343 Describes the installation and operation of CS1W-
CS1W-ETN01, CS1W-ETN11, CJ1W-ETN11 ETN01, CS1W-ETN11, and CJ1W-ETN11 Ethernet
Ethernet Unit Operation Manual Unit.
xi
About this Manual, Continued
This manual contains the following sections.
Section 1 introduces the hardware and software functions of the Serial Communications Boards and
the Serial Communications Units, including the communications modes, system configurations, and
specifications.
Section 2 describes the components of the Serial Communications Boards and the Serial Communi-
cations Units, the settings required for operation, and the memory allocated in the I/O memory of the
CPU Unit for controlling and monitoring communications.
Section 3 describes how to mounting the Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications
Units, and how to connect the ports to external devices.
Section 4 describes the procedure and other information required to use Host Link communications.
Section 5 describes the procedure and other information required to use protocol macros.
Section 6 provides an overview of the Serial Gateway, information on I/O memory allocations, and
procedures for using the functions. Information on protocol conversion, routing table requirements, and
communications frames is also provided. The Serial Gateway can be used only for Unit Ver. 1.2 or
later.
Section 7 describes the procedure and other information required to use the no-protocol mode. This
mode is supported for Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only.
Section 8 describes the procedure and other information required to use 1:N NT Links to Programma-
ble Terminals.
Section 9 describes the procedure and other information required to use Modbus-RTU slave mode.
Section 10 describes the procedure and other information required to conduct loopback test to check
the serial ports.
Section 11 describes the troubleshooting and maintenance procedures for the Serial Communications
Boards and the Serial Communications Units.
Appendix A to Appendix Q provide the specifications of the standard system protocols.
Appendix R provides information on using STUP(237) to change serial port settings.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per-
sonal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xii
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
xiii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xiv
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
xv
xvi
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards and Units.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
xvii
Intended Audience 1
1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man-
ual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned appli-
cations.
3 Safety Precautions
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a counter-
measure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is over-
loaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
xviii
Operating Environment Precautions 4
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified condi-
tions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system. Follow all installation instructions and precautions provided in
the operation manuals.
xix
Application Precautions 5
5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units,
Serial Communications Units, or any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Mounting or dismounting terminal blocks.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
xx
Application Precautions 5
• Be sure that the Bus Connection Unit and other items with locking devices
are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera-
tion.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Do not install the product near devices generating strong high-frequency
noise.
• Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Observe the following precautions for communications cables.
• Do not lay communications cables near power lines or high-voltage
lines.
• Always lay communications cables in ducts.
• Do not pull on the communications cables or bend the communications
cables beyond their natural limit. Doing either of these may break the
cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the communications cables or other wir-
ing lines. Doing so may break the cables.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunc-
tion or damage.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the con-
tents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• When transporting or storing Boards, wrap them in material that will pro-
tect LSIs, ICs, and other components from static electricity and be sure
that they remain within the storage temperature range.
• When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490)
instruction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one
(1 to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address (word
C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) instruction). Do not set the unit num-
ber of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link unit num-
ber without incrementing by one will access the PLC with the entered
Host Link unit number less one.
For example, specify the remote PLC with Host Link unit number 2 by
entering 3 for the remote destination node address. If 2 is entered, the
PLC with Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed.
To access a PLC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway
from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number,
without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display
Serial Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link
SYSWAY Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box.
xxi
Conformance to EC Directives 6
6 Conformance to EC Directives
6-1 Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2 Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
xxii
Conformance to EC Directives 6
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility) and EMI (Electromagnetic
Interference) standards in the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards
are as follows:
Unit/Board EMS EMI
CS1W-SCB21-V1/ EN61131-2 EN61000-6-4
SCB41-V1 (Radiated emission: 10-m
CS1W-SCU21-V1 regulations)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 EN61000-6-2
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
xxiii
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units 7
Mount the cores as lost to the end of the communications cable as possible,
as shown in the following illustration.
Serial
Commu-
nications
Unit/Board
xxiv
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units 7
Nameplate
CS1W-SCB21-V1
SERIAL COMMUNICATION BOARD
Lot No. 051020 Ver.1.3
xxv
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units 7
Example: In this Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog Box, unit version 1.3 is
displayed. Use this dialog box to confirm the unit version of the Serial Com-
munications Unit that is connected online.
xxvi
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units 7
Protocol Link word specifica- On-request I/O refresh- On-request I/O refreshing On-request I/O refreshing
macro tion data exchange ing only Continuous I/O refreshing Continuous I/O refreshing
timing (Same as pre-ver. 1.2)
Reception buffer pro- Clearing only Select to clear or hold Select to clear or hold con-
cessing for contents. tents. (Same as pre-ver.
PMCR(260) instruc- 1.2)
tion execution
Baud rate (bps) 38,400 max. (57,600 and 57,600 supported. 57,600 supported. (Same
115,200 not supported) as pre-ver. 1.2)
Standard system protocol addi- Not supported Supported Supported (Same as pre-
tions ver. 1.2)
MODBUS slave protocol added --- --- Supported
Note Make sure that a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later is used
when using no-protocol mode.
xxvii
Functions Added in the Unit Version 1.3 Upgrade 8
xxviii
Functions Added in the Unit Version 1.2 Upgrade 9
xxix
Functions Added in the Unit Version 1.2 Upgrade 9
xxx
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the hardware and software functions of the Serial Communications Boards and the Serial
Communications Units, including the communications modes, system configurations, and specifications.
1
Using this Manual Section 1-1
2
Overview Section 1-2
1-2 Overview
This section gives an overview of the Serial Communications Boards and the
Serial Communications Unit.
Serial Communications
Board
Inner Board slot
Connectable Devices The following serial communications modes are supported by the Serial Com-
munications Unit: Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) (see note 1), protocol macro,
1:N NT Link (see note 2), no-protocol (see note 1), Modbus-RTU slave (see
note 3), and loopback test modes. The devices shown in the following diagram
can be connected.
Programming
General-purpose Programmable Device (excluding
external device Terminal (PT) Programming Host computer
Console)
3
Overview Section 1-2
Note (1) The Host Link 1:1 and no-protocol modes are supported by unit version
1.2 or later.
(2) Only a 1:N NT Link is supported. A 1:1 NT Link is not supported.
(3) The Modbus-RTU slave mode is supported by unit version 1.3 or later.
Protocol
conversion
FINS message
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F-
PLC (Host Link)
compatible
OMRON
component
Modbus-RTU-compatible
device (e.g., Inverter)
Modbus-ASCII-compatible
device (e.g., Servo)
CS Series
4
Overview Section 1-2
CS1W-SCU21-V1 CS1W-SCU31-V1
(Two RS-232C ports) (Two RS-422A/485 ports)
CJ Series
Serial Communications Unit
PA205R
EF 2
789A
01
NO.
BCD
WIRE
2 4
MCPWR
L1 BUSY
PORT1
AC100-240V (RS422
INPUT /485)
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT2
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
PORT
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1
(Two RS-232C ports) (One RS-232C and One RS-
422A/485 Port)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
(Two RS-422A/485 ports)
RS-422A/485 port
RS-422A/485 port
Connectable Devices The following serial communications modes are supported by the Serial Com-
munications Boards: Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) (see note 1), protocol macro,
1:N NT Link (see note 2), no-protocol (see note 1), Modbus-RTU slave (see
note 3), and loopback test modes. The devices shown in the following diagram
can be connected.
5
Overview Section 1-2
Programming
General-purpose Programmable Device (excluding
external device Terminal (PT) Programming Host computer
Console)
CS/CJ-series PLC
Note (1) The Host Link 1:1 and no-protocol modes are supported by unit version
1.2 or later.
(2) Only a 1:N NT Link is supported. A 1:1 NT Link is not supported.
(3) The Modbus-RTU slave mode is supported by unit version 1.3 or later.
Protocol
conversion
FINS message
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F-
compatible PLC (Host Link)
OMRON
component
Modbus-RTU-compatible
device (e.g., Inverter)
Modbus-ASCII-compatible
device (e.g., Servo)
Functions Added in the The CS1W-SCB21-V1 and CS1W-SCB41-V1 Serial Communications Boards
“-V1” Upgrade and CS1W-SCU21-V1 Serial Communications Unit* were upgraded to sup-
port the Simple Backup Function in the “-V1” upgrade.
Simple Backup Function
The CPU Unit’s Simple Backup Function can be used to automatically
backup, restore, and compare the Protocol Macro data (both standard system
protocol and user-set protocol data) in the Serial Communications Board or
Unit’s flash memory with the data in the CPU Unit’s Memory Card. The Proto-
col Macro data is backed up, restored, or compared along with all of the data
in the CPU Unit. (The Simple Backup Function can be used with CS1-H, CJ1-
H, and CJ1M CPU Units only.)
6
Protocol Overview Section 1-3
Note *The CS-series Serial Communications Boards/Units without the “-V1” suffix
do not support this Simple Backup Function, but the CJ1W-SCU21/41 does
support this function even though the model number lacks the “-V1” suffix.
Note (1) The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode.
(2) Modbus-ASCII mode is not supported.
PLC Product Model Serial ports Serial communications mode
Series number
Host Link Protocol 1:N NT Link Loop- Serial Serial No- 1:1 Mod-
macro (See note 2.) back Gate- Gate- proto- Host bus-
test way way in col Link RTU
proto- (See slave
col note
macro 3.)
mode
CS Serial CS1W- RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Communi- SCB21-V1
cations RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Boards CS1W- RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
SCB41-V1
RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Serial CS1W- RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Communi- SCU21-V1
cations Unit RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
CS1W- RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
SCU31-V1
RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
CJ Serial CJ1W- RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Communi- SCU21-V1
cations Unit RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
CJ1W- RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
SCU31-V1
RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
CJ1W- RS-422A/485 OK (See note 1.) OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
SCU41-V1
RS-232C OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
--- Device to be connected Host computer General- PT None Depends on the Gen- Host Link com-
or Programming purpose protocol used at eral- puter
Device external the conversion pur-
device destination pose
exter-
nal
device
Supporting unit versions All unit versions Unit version 1.2 or later Unit version 1.3
or later
Note 1. A 4-wire connection must be used when using Host Link communications
for an RS-422A/485 connector.
7
Protocol Overview Section 1-3
Note 1. FINS commands can be sent across up to three different networks (count-
ing the local network) to a PLC on a remote network or to a host computer
connected to a PLC on a remote network.
2. Programming Devices can also be connected in Host Link mode.
Host Link
C-mode (Host Link)
command
FINS command
Host Link Host Link
FINS FINS
command command
8
Protocol Overview Section 1-3
Slave-initiated Communications
Host Link
FINS
command
Host Link
terminator
Host Link
header
Host Link
Remote network
(Controller Link
FINS or Ethernet)
command
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later supports the 1:1 Host Link protocol for C200H, C1000H,
and C2000H CPU Units, which enables the use of host programs for 1:1 Host
Links created for these PLCs. A Host Link-compatible device selection func-
tion is also provided for complete compatibility with the C-series Host Link and
CVM1/CV-series Host Link.
1-3-2 Protocol Macros
Data transfer procedures (protocols) with general-purpose external devices
are created using the CX-Protocol to match the communications specifica-
tions (half-duplex or full-duplex, and start-stop synchronization) of the external
device.
These protocols are stored in the Serial Communications Boards or the Serial
Communications Unit, and enable data to be exchanged with general-pur-
pose external devices simply by executing the PMCR(260) instruction in the
CPU Unit.
Standard system protocols for exchanging data with OMRON devices (such
as Temperature Controllers, Intelligent Signal Processors, Bar Code Readers,
and Modems) are provided as a standard feature in the Serial Communica-
tions Boards, the Serial Communications Unit, and the CX-Protocol. The CX-
Protocol can also be used to change the standard system protocols according
to user requirements.
PMCR(260)
Communications sequence
Protocol
9
Protocol Overview Section 1-3
The following additional functions are supported for unit Ver. 1.2 or later.
• Serial Gateway can be executed during protocol macro execution.
• An new I/O refresh method is provided for constant data conversion of
link words.
• The contents of the reception buffer can be held while the PMCR(260)
instruction is executing.
• A baud rate of 57,600 bps is possible (115,200 bps is not possible).
PT PT
10
Protocol Overview Section 1-3
Network
Serial Send FINS command
Communications CMND
Unit
Serial
Gateway FINS CompoWay/F (See note.)
Serial
Gate- FINS
way FINS
11
Features Section 1-4
ST Text CR+LF
No-protocol
Note: Start code and end code can be specified.
Modbus command
1-4 Features
This section describes the features of the Serial Communications Boards, the
Serial Communications Unit, and the protocols.
1-4-1 Serial Communications Boards and Units
Serial Communications A Serial Communications Board is installed as an option in a CPU Unit. Two
Boards (CS Series Only) serial ports can thus be added without using an I/O slot.
There are two types of Serial Communications Boards: One with two RS-
232C ports and one with one RS-232C and one RS-422A/485 port. The RS-
422A/485 port can be used for a 1:N connection with general-purpose exter-
nal devices without using Link Adapters to support the protocol macro func-
tion or NT Link function.
Serial Communications A total of up to 16 CPU Bus Units can be mounted on the CPU Rack or an
Unit (CS/CJ Series) Expansion Rack. The total of 16 must include all Serial Communications Units
and all other CPU Bus Units. The PLC can thus be expanded to provide addi-
tional serial ports as required by the system.
1-4-2 Protocols
Host Link Communications
Host Link communications are supported by all CS/CJ-series CPU Units.
Serial Communications Boards and Units can be used to connect a single
PLC to more than one host computer for Host Link communications, including
slave-initiated communications. Host Link communications provide the follow-
ing features.
Connect One Computer to An RS-422A/485 port can be used to connect one host computer to up to 32
Multiple PLCs CS/CJ-series PLCs.
12
Features Section 1-4
Computer Monitoring and Host Link communications enable the host computer to monitor or control
Control of PLCs PLC operations and to read and write I/O memory in the PLCs.
FINS Commands for In addition to C-series (Host Link) commands, FINS commands are also sup-
Complete Control ported. FINS commands give you the power to control CS/CJ-series PLC
functionality.
Redundant Error Both vertical and horizontal (FCS) parity checks are performed on communi-
Checking cations data to achieve essentially error-free communications. Combining
error checking and retry processing goes one step further to eliminate nearly
all the effects of communications problems.
Simultaneous Usage of Each Serial Communications Board and Unit provides two serial ports that
Both Ports can be used simultaneously to connect to two different host computers. A total
of up to 16 CPU Bus Units, including the Serial Communications Units, can be
mounted to one PLC. If all 16 CPU Bus Units are Serial Communications
Units, then up to 32 ports can be added.
Slave-initiated Communications can be performed either by sending a command from a host
Communications computer and having the PLC return a response, or by sending a command
from a PLC and having the computer send a response. Starting communica-
tions from a slave is called unsolicited communications, and is made possible
through the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions. These
can be used to send FINS commands to a host computer connected locally or
to a host computer connected to a remote network up to three networks away
(counting the local network).
Send FINS Commands to A FINS command contained within a Host Link header and terminator can be
Remote Networks sent using Host Link communications to PLCs connected not only on Host
Link networks, but also other interconnected remote networks up to three net-
works away (counting the local network). Various types of networks can exist
between the source of the command and the destination of the command.
13
Features Section 1-4
Bridge SEND(090),
Host Link Ethernet Network RECV(098),
CMND(490)
Protocol Macros
The main features of the protocol macro functions are described below. For
details, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344).
Wide Range of Communications are possible with virtually any general-purpose external
Communications device, provided it has an RS-232C or RS-422A/485 port, supports half-
Protocols duplex or full-duplex communications, and supports start-stop synchroniza-
tion.
Send Frames and Receive Send frames (command + data and other send frames) and receive frames
Frames Matching (response and other frames) can be created and registered according to the
Specifications communications frame specifications of the external device.
Communications-related Error check code calculations, frame length calculations during sending, and
Functions ASCII⇔Hexadecimal conversion of numeric data are supported.
Send/Receive Monitoring Receive wait monitoring, receive completion monitoring, and send completion
monitoring are supported. If monitoring times are exceeded, send/receive can
either be terminated, or retry processing can be performed.
Retry Processing Send/receive retry processing can be automatically executed when an error
occurs, simply by setting the number of retries.
PLC Read/Write Variables Variables for reading PLC memory can be included in the actual send frames.
in Send Frames and These can be used as destination addresses or data when reading PLC data
Receive Frames while sending. Variables for writing to PLC memory can be also included in
the actual receive frames. These can be used to write the contents of destina-
tion addresses or data to the PLC during reception.
Switch 1:N Repeat processing (repeat counters) for send/receive processing can be
Communications or the specified in communications sequences. This enables the same data to be
Data Write Destinations sent by switching destination addresses during communications 1:N (N = 32
Using Repeat Processing max. due to restrictions in the physical layer) or by switching the PLC memory
write destination addresses during data reception.
PLC Interrupts During An interrupt can be created in the PLC’s CPU Unit during data reception, and
Data Reception an interrupt program can be executed in the CPU Unit. (The PLC interrupt
function is supported only for the Serial Communications Boards. This func-
tion cannot be used with Serial Communications Units.)
Next Process Switching The contents of up to 15 set of expected receive data can be compared with
According to Receive Data the receive data to determine the next process.
New Error Check Codes LRC2 (two’s complement of LRC), and SUM1 (one’s complement of SUM)
have been added to the error check codes.
Step Queuing for Sync At any step of the communications sequence, the next process can be made
Signal from the PLC to wait until a sync signal from the PLC’s CPU Unit has been input. This
enables processing, such as data manipulations, to be performed in the CPU
Unit during the communications sequence.
Half-duplex or Full-duplex With the conventional protocol macro functions, only half-duplex transmis-
Transmissions sions were possible. With half-duplex mode, the reception buffer is cleared
14
Features Section 1-4
15
System Configurations Section 1-5
16
System Configurations Section 1-5
17
System Configurations Section 1-5
Communications can be sent across three different networks (counting the local network, but not including a
Host Link connection). Routing tables must be set in the PLCs.
Network 1
Network 2
Gateway
Note 1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard,
however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual
for the device being connected to confirm support.
2. The combined cable length for RS-422A/485 is 500 m including branch
lines.
3. The maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link
Adapter is connected.
4. Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
5. Four-wire connections must be used for RS-422A/485 connections with
Host Link communications.
6. “Resistance ON” indicates that the terminating resistance must be turned
ON.
7. “5-V power” indicates that a 5-V power supply is required for the Link
Adapter. Refer to the Link Adapter manual for details. Be sure that the pow-
er supply has sufficient capacity and accuracy and wire it away from high-
power lines and another sources of noise. A 5-V power supply is not re-
quired for a Link Adapter connected to a Serial Communications Board or
Unit because power is supplied from pin 6 of the connector.
8. The maximum baud rate of the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is 64 Kbps. Do
not use 115.2 Kbps when a Link Adapter is connected.
18
System Configurations Section 1-5
RS-232C RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON RS-422A/485
Resistance interface
ON
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
interface
Resistance
ON
19
System Configurations Section 1-5
RS-422A/
Resistance ON 485 Resistance ON
5-V power
20
System Configurations Section 1-5
Note 2.
Note 4. Resistance ON
Note 3.
RS-232C interface
NT-AL001-E NT-AL001-E
RS-232C RS-232C
Resistance Note 2.
ON
RS-422A/485 RS-232C
RS-232C
Resistance ON Note 3.
5-V power
Note 2.
Note 4. Resistance ON
Note 3.
RS-232C interface
NT-AL001-E NT-AL001-E
RS-232C RS-232C
Resistance
ON Note 2.
RS-422A/485 RS-232C
Resistance ON RS-232C
5-V power Note 3.
21
System Configurations Section 1-5
RS-422A/485 interface
B500-AL001
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
Note 2.
Note 4. Resistance ON
RS-232C interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistors ON Note 2.
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power Note 3.
Note 2.
Note 4. Resistance ON
RS-232C interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistors ON Note 2.
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power Note 3.
Note 1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard,
however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual
for the device being connected to confirm support.
2. The combined cable length for RS-422A/485 is 500 m including branch
lines.
22
Specifications Section 1-6
1-6 Specifications
1-6-1 Serial Communications Boards and Unit
CS Series
Device name Serial Communications Boards Serial Communications Unit
Classification Inner Board CPU Bus Unit
Model number CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1 CS1W-SCU21-V1 CS1W-SCU31-V1
Serial ports Port 1 RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C RS-422A/485
Port 2 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C RS-422A/485
Protocol Port 1 Host Link, protocol macro, NT Link, or loopback test can be selected for each port.
Port 2 Unit Ver. 1.2 or later also supports Serial Gateway, no-protocol, and 1:1 Host Link
modes. (Note: The Serial Gateway can also be executed in protocol macro mode.)
Unit Ver. 1.3 or later also supports Modbus-RTU slave mode.
Number of CPU Unit One Board per Inner Board slot None
mountable CPU Rack None A total of up to 16 Units, including all other
Boards/Units CPU Bus Units. No restrictions on the
Expansion Rack None
mounting location.
Data exchange Ordinary Allocated 25 words of the 100 words in Allocated 25 words of the 25 words in the
with the CPU refreshing of the Inner Board CIO Area (constant CPU Bus Unit CIO Area (constant data
Unit software data exchange with the CPU Unit) exchange with the CPU Unit)
switches and
status
Transfer from the Of the 768 words in the Inner Board DM Of the CPU Bus Unit DM Area, each
CPU Unit set by Area, each serial port is allocated 10 serial port is allocated 10 words (total 20
the system words (total 20 words). words).
Data is transferred from the CPU Unit Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at
at the following times: the following times:
• Startup or restart • Startup or restart
• Ladder instruction: STUP(237) • Ladder instruction: STUP(237)
• Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON • Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON
(Auxiliary Area) (Auxiliary Area)
Supporting CPU Units CS1 CPU Units
High-speed: CS1H-CPU67-V1/CPU66-V1/CPU65-V1/CPU64-V1/CPU63-V1
Standard: CS1G-CPU45-V1/CPU44-V1/CPU43-V1/CPU42-V1
CS1-H CPU Units
High-speed: CS1H-CPU67H/CPU66H/CPU65H/CPU64H/CPU63H
Standard: CS1G-CPU45H/CPU44H/CPU43H/CPU42H
Note A CS1-H CPU Unit with Unit Ver. 3.0 or later is required to use the no-proto-
col mode.
Simple Backup Function The CPU Unit’s Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Protocol Macro
data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit to the CPU Unit’s Memory Card. The
backed-up data can be restored or compared.
(The Simple Backup Function can be used with CS1-H CPU Units only.)
23
Specifications Section 1-6
Note The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Board or Unit.
When an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communica-
tions Board or Unit, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Board or
Unit. A current consumption of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter
that is connected. In the above specifications, “x” indicates that 150 mA must
be added for each port to which an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to
provide the required 5-V power supply.
24
Specifications Section 1-6
CJ Series
Device name Serial Communications Unit
Classification CPU Bus Unit
Model number CJ1W-SCU21-V1 CJ1W-SCU31-V1 CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Serial ports Port 1 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485
Port 2 RS-232C RS-422A/485 RS-232C
Protocol Port 1 Host Link, protocol macro, NT Link, or loopback test can be selected for
Port 2 each port.
Unit Ver. 1.2 or later also supports Serial Gateway, no-protocol, and 1:1
Host Link modes. (Note: The Serial Gateway can also be executed in pro-
tocol macro mode.)
Unit Ver. 1.3 or later also supports Modbus-RTU slave mode.
Number of mount- CPU Unit None
able Units CPU Rack A total of up to 16 Units, including all other CPU Bus Units. No restrictions
Expansion Rack on the mounting location.
Data exchange Ordinary Allocated 25 words of the 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit CIO Area (con-
with the CPU Unit refreshing of software stant data exchange with the CPU Unit)
switches and status
Transfer from the CPU Of the CPU Bus Unit DM Area, each serial port is allocated 10 words
Unit set by the system (total 20 words).
Data is transferred from the CPU Unit at the following times:
• Startup or restart
• Ladder instruction: STUP(237)
• Port Settings Changing Flag turns ON (Auxiliary Area)
Supporting CPU Units CJ1 CPU Units
CJ1G-CPU45/CPU44
CS1-H CPU Units
High-speed: CJ1H-CPU67H/CPU66H/CPU65H
Standard: CJ1G-CPU45H/CPU44H/CPU43H/CPU42H
CJ1M CPU Units
CJ1M-CPU23/CPU22/CPU21/CPU13/CPU12/CPU11
Note A CS1-H CPU Unit with Unit Ver. 3.0 or later is required to use the
no-protocol mode.
Simple Backup Function The CPU Unit’s Simple Backup Function can be used to backup the Pro-
tocol Macro data in the Serial Communications Board/Unit to the CPU
Unit’s Memory Card. The backed-up data can be restored or compared.
(The Simple Backup Function can be used with CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU
Units only.)
Current consumption (See note.) 280 mA + x 380 mA 380 mA + x
Weight 110 g max. 110 g max. 110 g max.
Note The current consumption is for one Serial Communications Unit. When an NT-
AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to the Serial Communications Board or
Unit, power is supplied to the Link Adapter from the Board or Unit. A current
consumption of 150 mA must be added for each Link Adapter that is con-
nected. In the above specifications, “x” indicates that 150 mA must be added
for each port to which an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected to provide
the required 5-V power supply.
25
Specifications Section 1-6
Note 1. Confirm the baud rates and communications distance supported by con-
nected devices.
2. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard,
however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual
for the device being connected to confirm support.
26
Specifications Section 1-6
27
Specifications Section 1-6
Item Description
Sequence contents Number of steps 16 max.
(step common per sequence
parameters) Transmission con- X-on/X-off flow, RS/CS flow, delimiter control, or contention control, and
trol parameters modem control can be selected.
Response notifica- Scan notification or interrupt notification (i.e., writing the receive data in
tion method (oper- the I/O memory area specified in the 4th operand of the PMCR(260)
and) instruction) can be selected.
Scan notification:
Writes the receive data to I/O memory during CPU Unit scanning.
Interrupt notification:
Writes the receive data to I/O memory as soon as it is received, and at
the same time specifies the execution of the interrupt program for the
CPU Unit.
Note The interrupt notification method can be executed only by a
Serial Communications Board. It cannot be used for a Serial
Communications Unit.
Scan method (fixed) Board and Unit
Interrupt notification Board only (see note 2)
Interrupt notification Board only (see note 2)
for reception case
number
Monitoring time Receive wait, receive completion, or send completion can be monitored.
during Setting range: 0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 minutes
send/receive
processing
Link word setting Area in which data is exchanged between the CPU Unit and the Serial
Communications Board or Unit during Communications Board or Unit
refreshing. Two areas are possible for each device: An area for storing
receive data and an area for storing send data.
Note Unit Ver. 1.2 or later supports continuous I/O refreshing in addition
to the previous on-request I/O refreshing.
28
Specifications Section 1-6
Item Description
Step contents Commands Send only (SEND), receive only (RECV), send and receive
(SEND&RECV), wait (WAIT), reception buffer clear (FLUSH), ER-ON
(OPEN), or ER-OFF (CLOSE)
Repeat counter 1 to 255 times
Retry count 0 to 9
(Only when the command is SEND&RECV)
Send wait time 0.01 to 0.99 s, 0.1 to 9.9 s, 1 to 99 s, or 1 to 99 minutes
(Only when the command is SEND or SEND&RECV)
With or without When receive processing is completed (when the receive data is stored
response write in the area specified in the 4th operand of the PMCR(260) instruction),
(operand) whether or not to store the received messages can be selected.
Next processing When a step has ended normally, End (sequence completed), Next (pro-
ceed to the next step No.), Goto (go to the specified step No.), or Abort
(interrupt the step and terminate that sequence) can be selected.
Error processing When a step has ended abnormally, End, Next, Goto, or Abort can be
selected.
Send message Data sent to the Consists of a header (*1), address (*2), length,
specified address data (*2), error check code (*3), and terminator
when the command (*1).
is SEND or For an explanation of *1, *2, and *3, see the next
SEND&RECV. page.
Receive message Data sent from the
specified address
when the command
is RECV or
SEND&RECV.
Reception matrix When the command Specifies the receive messages and the next pro-
is RECV or cessing for each of cases No. 00 to No. 15. Of the
SEND&RECV, sets maximum 16 cases, one case must be set as
the expected “Other” in the receive messages (in addition to the
receive messages set receive messages).
(15 max.), and
switches to the next
processing accord-
ing to the message
received.
Note 1. The baud rate and the communications distance sometimes depend on the
remote device.
2. A macro syntax error will occur if the interrupt notification method is exe-
cuted for a Serial Communications Unit.
3. When using 2-wire RS-422A/485 communications in Protocol Macro
Mode, set only modem controls for the send control parameters, and do
not use RS/CS flow controls.
29
Specifications Section 1-6
Item Description
Message unit *1: Con- ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code
contents Header and stant
terminator
data attributes
*2: Con- ASCII data, hexadecimal data, or control code (with an address, no control
Data stant code is possible)
attributes of Vari- No conversion, conversion to ASCII data, or conversion to hexadecimal data
addresses able (the read/write direction can be specified)
and data in
send/receive Designa- (X, Y)
messages tion X: Effective address (where read from, or where written to)
method Y: Data size (1 to 1,000)
Note The data size is the number of bytes on the transmission
path.
X Word designa- Word read (I/O Specify using Set leading
tion memory to the 3rd oper- address + n
send data) and of the (The linear
PMCR(260) expression aN
instruction. + b, including
Specify using a repeat counter
link word. N, is also pos-
sible for n.)
I/O memory
direct designa-
tion
Word write Specify using
(receive data to the 4th oper-
I/O memory) and of the
PMCR(260)
instruction.
Specify using a
link word.
I/O memory
direct designa-
tion
Wild card * Any data or address can be
received (only in receive mes-
sages)
Repeat counter N
30
Specifications Section 1-6
Item Description
Message unit *2: Vari- Y Linear expres- aN + b a: 0 to 1000; b: 1 to 1000
contents Data ables sion including N: Repeat counter value
attributes of repeat counter
addresses Wild card * Can be received regardless of
and data in the length (only in receive mes-
send/receive sages)
messages
Word designa- Word read (I/O Specify using Set leading
tion memory to the 3rd oper- address + n
send data) and of the (The linear
PMCR(260) expression aN
instruction. + b, including
Specify using a repeat counter
link word. N, is also pos-
sible for n.)
I/O memory
direct designa-
tion
*3: LRC, LRC2, CRC-CCITT, CRC-16, SUM, SUM1, and SUM2 can be calcu-
Error check codes lated.
Maximum length of 1,000 bytes. (A maximum length between 200 and 1,000 bytes can be set in
send/receive mes- the Setup Area.)
sages
Maximum number of 96 attributes (see note 1)
data attributes regis-
tered in one message
Maximum number of 30 attributes (see note 2)
write data attributes
registered in one mes-
sage
Trace function A total of up to 1,700 bytes (characters) of time-series data can be traced in
send and receive messages.
Changes to the step No. and control signals such as RS and CS can also be
traced.
Item Description
Conversion source FINS commands (received through network (including Host
Link FINS) or CPU bus)
Conversion functions • The received FINS command sent to the Board/Unit’s serial
port is converted according to the FINS command code as
follows:
2803 hex: FIN header removed and converted to Compo-
Way/F command.
2804 hex: FIN header removed and converted to Modbus-
RTU command.
2805 hex: FIN header removed and converted to Modbus-
ASCII command.
The converted command is sent to the serial port.
• When the received FINS command is sent to the Board or
Unit (user-specified FINS command code), the FINS com-
mand is enclosed in a Host Link header and terminator.
31
Specifications Section 1-6
Item Description
Converted format • CompoWay/F commands
• Modbus-RTU commands
• Modbus-ASCII commands
• Host Link FINS commands
Enabled serial com- Serial Gateway mode or protocol macro mode
munications mode
Queuing functions Up to five FINS commands can be converted and then queued
for processing.
Protocol macro exe- When a FINS command is received during protocol macro
cution processing execution, the Serial Gateway is executed using an interrupt
between steps in the communications sequence. If the next
step is a RECEIVE command, the Serial Gateway will not be
executed until the next step. For other conditions, the interrupt
is executed immediately.
Note The reception buffer is cleared during Serial Gateway
execution.
Note The Serial Gateway can be prohibited in protocol macro
mode by turning ON the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch
in the CIO Area.
Response timeout The time is monitored from when the message is converted
monitoring into the specified protocol using the Serial Gateway until the
response is received (in Serial Gateway mode or protocol
macro mode).
Default: 5 s (setting range: 0.1 to 25.5 s)
Note When a timeout occurs, the FINS end code (0205 hex:
Response timeout) is returned to the source of the FINS
command and a response is received after a timeout
occurs.
Send start timeout The time is monitored from when the FINS command is
monitoring received until it is converted into the specified protocol and
starts to be sent (in protocol macro mode only).
Default: 5 s (setting range: 0.1 to 25.5 s)
Note When a timeout occurs, the FINS end code (0204 hex:
Remote node busy) is returned to the source of the
FINS command. The send processing will not be exe-
cuted and the received FINS command will be dis-
carded.
Send delay The time can be set from when the message is converted into
another protocol using Serial Gateway conversion until the
data is actually sent. (Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode)
Default: 0 s (setting range: 0.01 to 300.00 s)
32
Specifications Section 1-6
No-protocol Specifications
Item Description
Communications Full-duplex
mode
Baud rate RS-232C port and RS-422A/485 ports:
1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600 bps
Default setting: 9,600 bps
Messages (commu- Set either of the following types in the Setup Area in the allo-
nications frame cation DM Area.
structure) 1. Data only (without start code and end code)
2. Start code + data
3. Data + end code
4. Start code + data + end code
5. Data + CR + LF
6. Start code + data +CR + LF
Set in allocated DM Area
(The start code can be included by setting it to between 00
and FF hex, and the end code can be included by setting it to
between 00 and FF hex. To exclude the end code, set the
number of receive data bytes.)
Start code None or 00 to FF hex
End code None, 00 to FF hex, or CR + LF
Number of receive Set the number of receive data bytes
data bytes during between 1 and 256 bytes (according to
reception the DM Area settings) when frame struc-
ture 1 or 2 above is used.
Sending messages • Serial Communications Board: TXD(236) instruction
• Serial Communications Unit: TXDU(256) instruction
Receiving messages • Serial Communications Board: RXD(235) instruction
• Serial Communications Unit: RXDU(255) instruction
Maximum message Sending and receiving: Up to 259 bytes including the start
length code and end code (up to 256 bytes excluding start/end
codes)
Data conversion No conversion
Communications None
protocol
Message delay time When the TXD(236) or TXDU(256) instruction is executed,
after the send delay time, the data is sent from the port.
0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms)
(Can be set in 10-ms units depending on the DM Area set-
tings)
Receive counter The number of data bytes (0 to 256) received at the port can
be counted.
Reception buffer The reception buffer is cleared immediately after executing the
clear timing RXD(235)/RXDU(255) instruction
33
Specifications Section 1-6
Modbus-RTU Specifications
Item Description
Mode Modbus-RTU slave mode (See note.)
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Default: 19,200 bps
Data length 8 bits
Parity Odd, even, or none
Default: Even
Stop bits Odd or even parity:1 bit
No parity: 2 bits
Address setting 1 to 247 (broadcasting: 0)
range
Frame format Slave address: 1 byte
Function code: 1 byte
Data: 0 to 252 bytes
CRC code: 2 bytes
34
Comparison to Previous Products Section 1-7
35
Comparison to Previous Products Section 1-7
Item C200HX/HG/HE CS CJ
Serial Boards Host Link Supported. (See note 1.) Supported. (1:1 Host Link communications can be selected
com- communica- when using Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, which enables reuse of
muni- tions host programs created using the C200H, C1000H, or
cations C2000H Series.)
modes A compatible device selection function has also been
added. (See note 1.) This enables Host Link functionality
that is fully compatible with C-series Host Links and
CVM1/CV-series Host Links.
Protocol Supported (except Supported.
macros COM02/COM03)
NT Link Supported. Supported (unified with 1:N NT Links).
communica-
tions
No-protocol Supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
communica- Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported.
tions
1:1 Links Supported. Not supported (supported by Controller Link Units or PLC
Link Units).
Loopback Not supported. Supported.
tests
Serial Gate- Not supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
way Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported.
Modbus- Not supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
RTU slave Unit Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
Unit Ver. 1.3 or later: Supported.
Units Host Link Supported. Supported. (1:1 Host Link communications can be selected
communica- when using Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, which enables reuse of
tions host programs created using the C200H, C1000H, or
C2000H Series.)
A compatible device selection function has also been
added. (See note 1.) This enables Host Link functionality
that is fully compatible with C-series Host Links and
CVM1/CV-series Host Links.
Protocol Not supported. Supported.
macros
NT Link Not supported. Supported (unified with 1:N NT Links).
communica-
tions
No-protocol Not supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
communica- Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported.
tions
1:1 Links Not supported. Not supported (supported by Controller Link Units or PLC
Link Units).
Loopback Not supported. Supported.
tests
Serial Gate- Not supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
way Unit Ver. 1.2 or later: Supported.
Modbus- Not supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
RTU slave Unit Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
Unit Ver. 1.3 or later: Supported.
36
Comparison to Previous Products Section 1-7
Item C200HX/HG/HE CS CJ
Baud rate Host Link 19,200 bps max. 115,200 bps max.
communica-
tions
Protocol 19,200 bps max. 38,400 bps max. (57,600 bps max. for Unit Ver. 1.2 or later)
macros
NT Link Standard NT Link Standard NT Link, high-speed NT Link (See note 2.)
(1:N mode)
No-protocol 19,200 bps max. 57,600 bps max.
communica-
tions
Serial Gate- Not supported. 115,200 bps max.
way
Host Link com- Sup- C- Supported. Supported.
ported mode
munications com- (Host
mands Link)
com-
mands
FINS Not supported. Supported.
com-
mands
Slave-initi- Boards: Data can be sent Boards and Units: FINS commands can be sent using
ated com- with TXD(236) instruction. SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490).
munications Units: Not supported.
Modbus- Not supported. Pre-Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
RTU slave Unit Ver. 1.2: Not supported.
Unit Ver. 1.3 or later: 115,200 bps max.
Note 1. For pre-Ver. 1.2 Units, the number of words that can be read and written
per frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different
for C-series Host Link Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications
Boards or Serial Communications Units. A host computer program previ-
ously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function correctly if it is
used in CS/CJ-series PLCs. When using Serial Communications
Boards/Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, these programs can be reused by
setting the Host Link compatible device mode to mode C (C500/120) or
mode D (D200H). (Alternatively, check the host computer program before
using it and make any corrections required to handle different frame text
lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Refer-
ence Manual (W342) for details.)
2. For CS-series PLCs, a high-speed NT Link is available only with Serial
Communications Boards/Units manufactured on or after December 20,
1999. With earlier models, only the standard NT Link is available.
NT31/631(C)-V2 are the only PTs for which high-speed NT link is supported.
The following tables shows the improvements made in the protocol macro
function.
37
Comparison to Previous Products Section 1-7
38
Comparison to Previous Products Section 1-7
39
Comparison to Previous Products Section 1-7
40
Selecting the Serial Communications Mode Section 1-8
• Reusing host • Reusing host computer programs for 1:1 Host Link 1:1 Host Link
computer created using C200H/C1000H/C2000H PLCs Used with Host Link compatible
programs for • Reusing host computer programs for Host Link created device selection function (Select
existing PLC using CVM1-series PLCs C mode or D mode)
Host Link compatible device
selection function (Select B mode)
• General- Protocol (including Protocol macro Use the CX-Protocol to • Section 5 Using
purpose no-protocol) used create a new protocol. Protocol Macros
external device mainly for stop-start
synchronous data • CX-Protocol Operation
sending and reception Manual (W344)
41
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
42
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
• Restart the Board by turning ON the Inner Board Restart Bit (A60800)
or restart the Unit turning ON one of the CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits
(A50100 to A50115, where the bit number corresponds to the unit
number).
• Restart the port on the Serial Communications Board by turning ON
one of the Communications Board Port Settings Change Bits (A63601
for port 1 and A63602 for port 2) or restart the port on the Serial Com-
munications Unit by tuning ON one of the Communications Unit Port
Settings Change Bits (A620 to A635: The word will be A620 + unit
number and the bit will be bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2).
• Execute the STUP(237) instruction. The STUP(237) instruction is ex-
ecuted in the ladder program to change the serial communications
mode of a serial port. See Appendix O Changing Port Settings Using
STUP(237).
9. Execute communications.
Use the software switches or the allocated flags and words allocated in the
CIO Area in the ladder program to control communications.
The following words are allocated in the CIO Area:
Board: 25 words from CIO1900
Unit: 25 words from CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Setting the Unit Number When a Serial Communications Unit is used, set the unit number switch at the
for Serial top of the front panel of the Unit to between 0 and F. The number that is set
Communications Units will determine which words are allocated as the Setup Area in the DM Area
and which words are allocated in the CIO Area.
CS-series Units CJ-series Units
SCU41
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
SCU21-V1
RUN RDY RDY ERH SD2 RD2
ERC ERH
SD1 SD2 TERM
RD1 RD2 Unit number switch OFF ON 3456 UNIT Unit number switch
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
WIRE
UNIT 2 4
210F
EDCB
6543
No. A987
43
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
First word in Setup Area allocated in DM Area: First word allocated in the CIO Area:
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
(20 words are used beginning from m, (all words are used beginning with n)
10 words for each port)
Unit No. Words Unit No. Words
Unit No. 0 D30000 to D30099 Unit No. 0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
Unit No. 1 D30100 to D30199 Unit No. 1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
Unit No. 2 D30200 to D30299 Unit No. 2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
Unit No. 3 D30300 to D30399 Unit No. 3 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
Unit No. 4 D30400 to D30499 Unit No. 4 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
Unit No. 5 D30500 to D30599 Unit No. 5 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
Unit No. 6 D30600 to D30699 Unit No. 6 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
Unit No. 7 D30700 to D30799 Unit No. 7 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
Unit No. 8 D30800 to D30899 Unit No. 8 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
Unit No. 9 D30900 to D30999 Unit No. 9 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
Unit No. A D31000 to D31099 Unit No. A CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
Unit No. B D31100 to D31199 Unit No. B CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
Unit No. C D31200 to D31299 Unit No. C CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
Unit No. D D31300 to D31399 Unit No. D CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
Unit No. E D31400 to D31499 Unit No. E CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
Unit No. F D31500 to D31599 Unit No. F CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
With a Serial Communications Board, the following words are always allo-
cated.
Setup Area in the DM Area: Words allocated in the CIO Area:
D32000 to D32767 CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
D32000 to D32009 Port 1 Setup Area CIO 1900 Software switch
D32010 to D32019 Port 2 Setup Area CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status
D32020 to D32767 Reserved for the system CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 Port 1 status
CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Port 2 status
CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Reserved for the system
1,2,3... 1. Press in the lever on the Inner Board installation cover, first on the top and
then on the bottom, and remove the cover.
Press in the lever on the top. Press in the lever on the bottom.
44
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
1,2,3... 1. Catch the hook on the top of the back of the Unit on the Backplane, and
then rotate the Unit downward to mount it.
Hook
Backplane
Duct
At least 20 mm
CPU Unit
I/O Power Backplane
Supply Unit
Remote I/O
Unit
At least 20 mm
Duct
Phillips
screwdriver
45
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
1,2,3... 1. Align the connectors properly and then press in on the Unit to connect it.
Connector
PA205R
EF 2
789A
01
NO.
BCD
WIRE
2 4
MCPWR
L1 BUSY
PORT1
AC100-240V (RS422
INPUT /485)
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT2
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
PORT
2. Slide the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit until they lock the Units
together.
Slider
PA205R
POWER SYSMAC
CJ1G-CPU44
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
SCU41
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1 Lock
PROGRAMMABLE RDY ERH SD2
PRPHL RD2
CONTROLLER
COMM TERM
OFF ON
3456 UNIT
Release
EF 2
OPEN
789A
01
NO.
BCD
WIRE
2 4
MCPWR
L1 BUSY PORT1
AC100-240V (RS422
INPUT /485)
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT2
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
PORT
Note If the sliders are not locked properly, the Serial Communications Units may
not function correctly.
Connections Connect the external devices using RS-232C or RS-422A cables. For details
on the connector pin layout and the connection methods, see Section 3 Instal-
lation and Wiring, and refer to the relevant manuals for the external devices to
be connected.
Types of Port for Different Models
The types of port for the different models of Serial Communication Boards
and Units are shown in the following table.
PLC Series Type of Unit Model Port 1 Port 2
CS Series Serial Communica- CS1W- RS-232C RS-232C
tions Board SCB21-V1
CS1W- RS-232C RS-422A/485
SCB41-V1
Serial Communica- CS1W- RS-232C RS-232C
tions Unit SCU21-V1
CS1W- RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485
SCU31-V1
CJ Series CJ1W-SCU21- RS-232C RS-232C
V1
CJ1W-SCU31- RS-422A/485 RS-422A/485
V1
CJ1W-SCU41- RS-422A/485 RS-232C
V1
46
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
OFF ON TERM
2 4 WIRE
NT-AL001-E
Terminating resis-
tance ON, 5-V power
supply required Terminating resistance
ON
Also perform other required processing, such as setting switches on the exter-
nal device(s).
Connection Example for Protocol Macros, Serial Gateway, No-protocol
Mode, and Modbus-RTU Slave
Serial Communications
Board
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
General-purpose
Terminating external device
resistance ON General-purpose
external device
General-purpose
external device
Terminating
resistance ON
General-purpose
external device
Also perform other required processing, such as setting switches on the exter-
nal device(s).
Connection Example for 1:N NT Links
Refer to the manual for the PT.
Connecting Programming Devices
Connect the Programming Console, CX-Programmer, or CX-Protocol to the
CPU Unit as required.
47
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
Creating I/O Tables for I/O tables must be created for Serial Communications Units. Create the I/O
Serial Communications table using a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console or CX-
Units Programmer.
Setting the Setup Area in Set the serial communications mode and the communications specifications
the DM Area for the Board or Unit. Use a Programming Device, such as a Programming
Console or CX-Programmer, or the CX-Protocol to set the Setup Area.
Host Link Communications
The following table shows the default (standard) settings for Host Link com-
munications.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Board Unit Bit Setting Meaning
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m+10 15 0 Start bit: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 2 bits
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
08 to 11 5 Host Link mode
D32001 D32011 m+1 m+11 00 to 03 0 The baud rate setting is disabled when the
default settings are used.
D32002 D32012 m+2 m+12 15 0 Send delay: 0 ms
D32003 D32013 m+3 m+13 15 0 CTS control: No
00 to 07 00 Host Link unit number: 0
Protocol Macros
The following table shows the default (standard) settings for protocol macros.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Board Unit Bit Setting Meaning
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m + 10 15 0 Start bit: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 2 bits
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
11 to 08 6 Protocol Macro mode
D32001 D32011 m+1 m + 11 03 to 00 0 9,600 bps when the default settings are
used.
48
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
NT Link Mode
The following table shows the default (standard) settings for NT link when the
maximum PT unit number is 5.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Board Unit Bit Setting Meaning
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m + 10 11 to 08 2 1:N NT Link
D32001 D32011 m+1 m + 11 03 to 00 0 The baud rate is set to the standard NT link
setting when the default settings are used.
D32006 D32016 m+6 m + 16 02 to 00 5 1:N NT Link maximum unit number
(example)
Serial Gateway
Using Serial Gateway Alone
1. Make the settings in the Setup Area.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Board Unit Bit Setting Meaning
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m+10 15 0 Start bits: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 2
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
11 to 08 9 hex Serial communications mode: Serial Gate-
way
D32002 D32012 m+2 m+12 15 0 Send delay: 0 ms
D32003 D32013 m+3 m+13 15 0 CTS control: No
D32007 D32017 m+7 m+17 15 to 08 00 hex Response timeout monitoring time: 5 s
2. Set the local network table in the routing tables as required (using CX-Net).
Using Serial Gateway During Protocol Macro Execution
1. Make the settings in the Setup Area.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Board Unit Bit Setting Meaning
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m+10 11 to 08 6 hex Serial communications mode: Protocol
macro
D32002 D32012 m+2 m+12 15 0 Send delay: 0 ms
D32003 D32013 m+3 m+13 15 0 CTS control: No
D32007 D32017 m+7 m+17 15 to 08 00 hex Response timeout monitoring time: 5 s
07 to 00 00 hex Serial Gateway send start timeout monitor-
ing time: 5 s
49
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
3. Set the local network table in the routing tables as required (using CX-Net).
No-protocol Mode
The following example is for the default (standard) communications condi-
tions, with the send delay set to 100 ms, start code included (e.g., @), end
code included (CR + LF), and number of receive bytes set to 100 bytes.
Board Unit Bit Setting Meaning
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m+10 15 0 Start bits: 1 bit
Data length: 7 bits
Parity: Even
Stop bits: 2 bits
Baud rate: 9,600 bps
11 to 08 3 hex No-protocol
D32001 D32011 m+1 m+11 03 to 00 0 hex The baud rate is 9,600 bps when the default
settings are used.
D32002 D32012 m+2 m+12 15 1 Send delay: User-specified
11 to 00 00 hex Send delay setting range: 10 decimal (000A
hex), Unit: 10 ms
D32003 D32013 m+3 m+13 15 1 CTS control 1: Yes
D32004 D32014 m+4 m+14 15 to 08 40 hex Start code: @ (40 hex)
D32005 D32015 m+5 m+15 12 1 Start code: Yes
09 to 08 10 End code: CR + LF
07 to 00 64 hex Number of receive data bytes: 100 bytes
50
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
Validate the New Settings Make the new settings in the Setup Area valid by performing one of the follow-
ing.
• Turn the power OFF and then ON again. The Setup Area allocated in the
DM Area will be read when the power is turned ON.
• Restart the Board by turning ON the Inner Board Restart Bit (A60800) or
restart the Unit turning ON one of the CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits (A50100
to A50115, where the bit number corresponds to the unit number). (See
following table.)
• Restart the port on the Serial Communications Board by turning ON one
of the Communications Board Port Settings Change Bits (A63601 for port
1 and A63602 for port 2) or restart the port on the Serial Communications
Unit by tuning ON one of the Communications Unit Port Settings Change
Bits (A620 to A635: The word will be A620 + unit number and the bit will
be bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2).
51
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
Inner Board Restart Bit and CPU Communications Board/Unit Port Settings
Bus Unit Restart Bits Change Bits
Board A60800 Unit number Port 1 Port 2
Units A50100 (Unit No. 0) Board A63601 A63602
A50101 (Unit No. 1) Units Unit No. 0 A62001 A62002
A50102 (Unit No. 2) Unit No. 1 A62101 A62102
A50103 (Unit No. 3) Unit No. 2 A62201 A62202
A50104 (Unit No. 4) Unit No. 3 A62301 A62302
A50105 (Unit No. 5) Unit No. 4 A62401 A62402
A50106 (Unit No. 6) Unit No. 5 A62501 A62502
A50107 (Unit No. 7) Unit No. 6 A62601 A62602
A50108 (Unit No. 8) Unit No. 7 A62701 A62702
A50109 (Unit No. 9) Unit No. 8 A62801 A62802
A50110 (Unit No. A) Unit No. 9 A62901 A62902
A50111 (Unit No. B) Unit No. A A63001 A63002
A50112 (Unit No. C) Unit No. B A63101 A63102
A50113 (Unit No. D) Unit No. C A63201 A63202
A50114 (Unit No. E) Unit No. D A63301 A63302
A50115 (Unit No. F) Unit No. E A63401 A63402
Unit No. F A63501 A63502
• Execute the STUP(237) instruction. The Board or Unit Setup Area can be
changed while the PLC power supply is ON. The STUP(237) instruction
can be used, for example, when a communications sequence for a
modem connection is executed in Protocol Macro Mode to switch the
operating mode to Host Link Mode when a certain condition is estab-
lished. This enables monitoring or programming of the CPU Unit to be
carried out from a host computer. See Appendix O Changing Port Set-
tings Using STUP(237).
Executing The required data and ladder program are created to perform communica-
Communications tions in the serial communications mode that has been set.
Host Link Communications
Sending C-mode and FINS Commands from Host Computers to PLCs
To send C-mode commands or FINS commands, programs must be created
on the host computer to send commands to PLCs and to receive responses
back from the PLCs. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands
Reference Manual (W342) for details.
Programming to
send commands and
receive responses.
Host computer
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Command
52
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
Programming to
return responses.
CPU Unit
SEND(090) can be used to send data from the PLC to a host computer. If the
input condition turns ON when the Communications Port Enabled Flag is ON,
10 words of data from CIO 0100 to CIO 0109 will be sent to the host computer
connected to port 1 on the Serial Communications Unit with network address
0, node address 0, and unit address 10 Hex.
Communications Port
Enabled Flag for Port 0
Input condition A20200
@SEND (90)
0100 First send word: CIO 0100
0000 "0000" used to send to a host computer.
First control data word: D00200
D00200
The control data for the above instruction is shown in the following table.
Word Contents Meaning
D00200 000A Number of send words: 10
D00201 0100 Bits 00 to 07: Destination network address 0
Bits 08 to 10: Serial Communications Unit port 1
D00202 0010 Bits 00 to 07: Destination unit address 10 Hex
Bits 08 to 15: Destination node address 0
D00203 0000 Bits 00 to 04: Number of retries is 0
Bits 08 to 11: Communications port 0
Bit 15: Response required
D00204 0000 Response monitoring time: 2 s (default value for 0000)
A program would be required at the host computer to receive the above data
and return a response.
Protocol Macros
When a standard system protocol (provided in the Serial Communications
Board, Serial Communications Unit, and CX-Protocol) is executed.
Using Standard System Protocols
Uses standard system protocol No. 600
Board or Unit
Executed
with
PMCR(260)
(237)
CPU Unit
External device
Example: K3N Series
Digital Panel Meter
53
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
If the input condition turns ON when the Protocol Macro Executing Flag
(CIO 191915 for Port 2) is OFF and the Communications Port Enabled
Flag (A20207: Internal logic port, communications port 7) is ON, commu-
nications sequence No. 600 of the standard system protocol in the Serial
Communications Board is called, and data is sent and received via port 2
of the Serial Communications Board.
Send Data
Receive Data
D:D00010 0004 4 words from D00010 to D00013
D00011 Response code is stored.
D00012 The read data (in this case, the present value of K3N) is stored.
D00013
54
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
Board or Unit
PMCR(260)
CPU Unit
External device
55
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
If the input condition turns ON when the Protocol Macro Executing Flag
(CIO 191915 for port 2) is OFF and the Communications Port Enabled
Flag (A20207 for internal logic port, communications port 7) is ON, com-
munications sequence No. 100 registered in the Serial Communications
Board is called, and data is sent and received via port 2 of the Serial Com-
munications Board.
The amount of send data depends on the number of words specified in
D00000 (the number of words after D00001 plus 1 for D00000 itself), and
is sent from the next word after D00001.
c. Execute PMCR(260)
4. For details on the confirming operation, see Section 12 Tracing and I/O
Memory Monitoring.
• Transmission Line Tracing
The data in the send/receive messages flowing over the transmission
line (RS-232C or RS-422A/485) and the control codes are traced.
• I/O Memory Monitoring
Monitors send/receive data and the status of the various flags.
1:N NT Links
Refer to the user’s manual for the PT.
Serial Gateway Mode
• Sending FINS commands from the PLC
Send FINS commands using the CMND(490) instruction. For details, refer
to 6-8-5 Sending Commands Using the CMND(490) Instruction.
• Sending FINS commands from the PT
Execute the PT’s SAP (Smart Active Parts) library.
• Sending FINS commands from a Programming Device that uses CX-
Server as the communications driver, such as the CX-Programmer.
56
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
1. Register the PLC to be connected serially (using Host Link FINS) in the
project gateway (e.g., PLC2).
2. In the Change PLC Dialog Box of the target PLC (e.g., PLC1), select the
relay PLC (gateway PLC) in the Network Type pull-down menu (e.g.,
[PLC2] (See note.)) and click the Settings Button to the right of the Net-
work Type pull-down menu.
Note The PLC name enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [PLC2]) indicates
the gateway PLC.
3. The Network Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Guide for Se-
rial Gateway Button. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be dis-
played.
4. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the unit and the port number under the Calculate Address Area, the
serial port number address is automatically calculated in the Calculated
Address Field.
Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option, and enter the actual Host
Link unit number for the target (communications partner) PLC in the Host
Link Unit Number field (see note).
Finally, click the Apply Button.
57
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
The Serial
Communications port
address is automatically
calculated.
Select the Unit.
Note When using the CX-Programmer, enter the actual Host Link unit number. Do
not add 1 to the value. The CX-Programmer will automatically add 1 internally.
No-protocol Mode
Use the following procedure when creating ladder programs.
a) Sending to Serial Communications Boards
Execute the TXD(236) instruction to send the program to the external
device from the PLC.
Note For the TXD(236) instruction, include a NO condition of the Send
Ready Flag (bit A35605/A35613) in an AND in the input condition.
Execute the RXD(235) instruction to receive the program at the PLC from
the external device.
Note For the RXD(235) instruction, include a NO condition of the Recep-
tion Completed Flag (bit A35606/A35614) in an AND in the input con-
dition.
b) Sending to Serial Communications Units
Execute the TXDU(256) instruction to send the program to the external
device from the PLC.
Note For the TXDU(256) instruction, include a NO condition of the Com-
munications Port Enabled Flag (bits A20200 to A20207) and a NC
condition of the TXDU(256) Executing Flag (word n+9/n+19, bit 05)
in an AND in the input condition.
Execute the RXDU(255) instruction to receive the program at the PLC
from the external device.
Note For the RXDU(255) instruction, include NO conditions of the Recep-
tion Completed Flag (word n+9/n+19, bit 06) and the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flags (bits A20200 to A20207) in an AND in the
input condition.
58
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
Host computer
Serial Communications Board/Unit
Command
59
Basic Operating Procedure Section 1-9
60
SECTION 2
Initial Settings and I/O Memory Allocations
This section describes the components of the Serial Communications Boards and the Serial Communications Units, the
settings required for operation, and the memory allocated in the I/O memory of the CPU Unit for controlling and
monitoring communications.
61
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
RDY RDY
COMM1 Indicators COMM1
COMM2 COMM2
Port 1
PORT1 RS-232C PORT1
OFF ON TERM
2 4 WIRE
Indicators
Indicator Color Status Meaning
RDY Green Lit Operating normally, and protocol macro prepara-
tions have been completed.
Flashing Operating normally, and protocol macros are
being prepared. ()
Not lit An error has occurred in the Serial Communica-
tions Board.
Board/Unit error, CPU Unit watchdog timer error,
Board watchdog timer error
COMM1 Yellow Lit Port 1 is being used for sending or receiving.
Not lit Port 1 is not being used for sending or receiving.
COMM2 Yellow Lit Port 2 is being used for sending or receiving.
Not lit Port 2 is not being used for sending or receiving.
CPU Unit Indicators A Serial Communications Board is mounted as an Inner Board in the CPU
Unit and thus affect the CPU Unit ERR/ALM indicator.
Indicator Color Status Meaning
ERR/ALM Red Lit Fatal error If a fatal error occurs, the CPU
Unit will stop operation in either
RUN or MONITOR mode.
Flashing Non-fatal If a non-fatal error occurs, the
error CPU Unit will continue opera-
tion in either RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Not lit Normal The CPU Unit is operating nor-
operation mally.
If an error in the Inner Board is the cause of the error indicated on the ERR/
ALM indicator, information on the error will be stored in A424: Inner Board
62
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
Error Information. Refer to Inner Board Error Information under 2-3-3 Related
Auxiliary Area Bits.
For actions required when an error occurs, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting
and Maintenance.
RS-232C Ports
Protocol Host Link Protocol macro 1:N NT Links
Communications Full-duplex Full-duplex or half- Half-duplex
method duplex
Synchronization Start-stop synchronization (asynchronous)
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/ 1,200/2,400/4,800/ Standard NT link or
9,600/19,200/ 9,600/19,200/ high-speed NT link
38,400/57,600/ 38,400 bps
115,200 bps
Connections 1:1 (1:N is possible using Link Adapters)
Transmission 15 m max. (see note 2)
distance
Interface Complies with EIA RS-232C
Note 1. Pin No. 1 and the shell are connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the
Power Supply Unit inside of the Serial Communications Board. Therefore,
the cable shield can be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Sup-
ply Unit.
2. The status of the RTS (RS), CTS (CS), DSR (DR), and DTR (ER) signals
can be monitored in the words allocated in the CIO Area. For details, refer
to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations.
3. Pin 6 (5 V) is required when the NT-AL001-E Link Adapter is connected.
For details on connection methods, refer to 3-3 Wiring.
4. The DSR signal is used to monitor the signal cable. It can also be used as
a CD (carrier detect) signal. (The DSR signal does not affect system oper-
ation, and is available for use by the user.)
63
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
!Caution Do not connect the 5-V power supply of Pin 6 to any external device other
than an NT-AL001-E Link Adapter. Otherwise, the external device and the
Serial Communications Board or Unit may be damaged.
The following cables are provided for connection to NT-AL001-E Link Adapt-
ers. We recommend that these cables be used.
NT-AL001-E connecting cables: XW2Z-070T-1 (0.7 m)
XW2Z-200T-1 (2 m)
Applicable Connectors
Plug: XM2A-0901 (manufactured by OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0911-E (manufactured by OMRON) or equivalent
One plug and one hood are provided for each port.
Recommended Cables
UL2426 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
AWG28 × 5P IFVV-SB (not UL-approved, Fujikura Ltd.)
UL2426-SB (MA) 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL-approved, Hitachi Cable, Ltd.)
Cable length: 15 m max.
RS-422A/485 Port
Protocol Host Link Protocol macro 1:N NT Links
Communications Full-duplex Full-duplex or half- Half-duplex
method duplex
Synchronization Start-stop synchronous (asynchronous)
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/ 1,200/2,400/4,800/ Standard NT link or
9,600/19,200/ 9,600/19,200/ high-speed NT link
38,400/57,600/ 38,400 bps (See note.)
115,200 bps
Connections 1:N (N: 32 Units max.) 1:N (N: 8 Units
max.)
Transmission dis- 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. T-
tance branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
Interface Complies with EIA RS-485
Note 1. When 2-wire connections are used, use Pins 1 and 2, or Pins 6 and 8.
64
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
2. The shell is connected to the ground terminal (GR) of the Power Supply
Unit inside of the Serial Communications Board. Therefore, the cable
shield can be grounded by grounding the GR of the Power Supply Unit.
3. With SDA/B or RDA/B, the signal polarity may be reversed by the remote
device. Be sure to check the polarity before wiring.
Applicable Connectors
Plug: XM2A-0901 (OMRON) or equivalent
Hood: XM2S-0911-E (OMRON) or equivalent
One plug and one hood are provided for each port.
Recommended Cables
CO-HC-ESV-3P × 7/0.2 (manufactured by Hirakawa Hewtech Corp.)
Cable length: 500 m max. (The total combined cable length is 500 m max. T-
branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.)
Terminating Resistance The terminating resistance switch is provided on the CS1W-SCB41-V1 only.
Switch: TERM When an RS-422/485 port is used, set the switch to ON if the Serial Commu-
nications Board is on the end of the transmission line. Refer to Section 3
Installation and Wiring for the ON/OFF settings.
Label Name Settings Factory setting
TERM Terminating ON: Terminating OFF: Terminating
resistance switch resistance ON resistance OFF
OFF: Terminating
resistance OFF
Note The status of terminating resistance setting can be monitored in the words
allocated in the CIO Area. For details, refer to 2-3 I/O Memory Allocations.
2-Wire or 4-Wire Switch: The 2-wire or 4-wire switch is provided on the CS1W-SCB41-V1 only.
WIRE When an RS-422/485 port is used, set the switch to “2” when 2-wire connec-
tions are used, and set the switch to “4” when 4-wire connections are used.
For details, refer to Section 3 Installation and Wiring.
Label Name Settings Factory setting
WIRE 2-wire or 4-wire 2: 2-wire 2: 2-wire
switch 4: 4-wire
External Dimensions
CS1W-SCB21-V1 CS1W-SCB41-V1 Mounted in the CPU Unit
130
SCB21-V1 SCB41-V1
65
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
EDCB
65432
No.
EDCB
switch No.
6543
A987 A987
(for port 1)
TERM OFF ON
WIRE 2 4 2-wire or 4-wire switch
Port 1 PORT1
(RS422
(for port 1)
PORT1 RS-232C /485)
Port 1
RS-422A/485
Terminating resistance switch
TERM OFF ON
4
(for port 2)
WIRE 2
PORT2 2-wire or 4-wire switch
Port 2 (RS422
(for port 2)
/485)
PORT2
RS-232C
Port 2
RS-422A/485
Indicators
Indicator Color Status Meaning
RUN Green Lit Operating normally
Not lit Unit hardware error.
RDY Green Lit Protocol macro preparations have been com-
pleted.
Flashing Protocol macros are being prepared. (see note
1)
Not lit Hardware error in Serial Communications Unit.
ERH Red Lit CPU Unit error, or this Unit has not been regis-
tered in the I/O table. Routing tables incor-
rectly registered in the Unit.
Flashing System Setup error (see note 2)
Not lit CPU Unit is operating normally and the Setup
Area settings are normal.
ERC Red Lit Unit hardware error, or loopback test error
Flashing Protocol data syntax error or protocol data
error (SUM error).
Not lit Unit is operating normally.
SD1 Yellow Lit Port 1 is being used for sending.
Not lit Port 1 is not being used for sending.
RD1 Yellow Lit Port 1 is being used for receiving.
Not lit Port 1 is not being used for receiving.
TER1 (see Yellow Lit Terminating resistance is connected internally
note 3) for port 1.
Not lit Terminating resistance is not connected inter-
nally for port 1.
SD2 Yellow Lit Port 2 is being used for sending.
Not lit Port 2 is not being used for sending.
RD2 Yellow Lit Port 2 is being used for sending.
Not lit Port 2 is not being used for sending.
TER2 (see Yellow Lit Terminating resistance is connected internally
note 3) for port 2.
Not lit Terminating resistance is not connected inter-
nally for port 2.
66
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
UNIT No. Switch: Unit Set the CPU Bus Unit unit number for the Unit. The CIO Area and DM Area
Number are allocated according to the unit number setting. The words that are allo-
cated are used for the software switches, Status Area, and the System Setup.
Set the unit number between 0 and F. The factory setting is for unit number 0.
RS-232C Ports The specifications of the RS-232C are the same as those for the RS-232C
port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-232C Ports on page 63.
RS-422A/485 Ports The specifications of the RS-422A/485 port are the same as those for the RS-
422A/485 port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-422A/485 Port
on page 64.
67
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
SCU21-V1
RUN RDY
ERC ERH
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
UNIT
210F
EDCB
No.
6543
A987
130 PORT1
PORT2
35 100
CS1W-SCU31-V1
SCU31-V1
RUN RDY
ERC ERH
SD1 SD2
RD1 RD2
TER1 TER2
UNIT
10 F
EDCB
65432
No. A987
TERM OFF ON
WIRE 2 4
PORT1
(RS422
130 /485)
TERM OFF ON
WIRE 2 4
PORT2
(RS422
/485)
35 100
68
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
SCU21-V1 SCU41-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
3456 UNIT
TERM
OFF ON 3456 UNIT Terminating resistance switch
EF 2
EF 2
789A
789A
01
01
BCD NO. BCD NO.
WIRE
Unit number switch 2 4 Unit number switch
PORT1 PORT1
(RS422
2-wire/4-wire switch
/485)
PORT2 PORT2
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
SCU31-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
Indicators
RDY ERH SD2 RD2 TER2
TERM
UNIT
Terminating resistance
OFF ON 3456
switch (for port 1) Magnified view of
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
WIRE
2 4 bottom-right corner
Unit number switch
PORT1
(RS422
/485) 2-wire/4-wire switch
(for port 1)
Port 1: RS-422A/485
Terminating resistance
PORT2
(RS422
switch (for port 2)
/485)
2-wire/4-wire switch
Port 2: RS-422A/485
(for port 2)
TERM
OFF ON
WIRE
2 4
Indicators
Indicator Color Status Meaning
RUN Green Lit Operating normally
Not lit Unit hardware error.
RDY Green Lit Protocol macro preparations have been com-
pleted.
Flashing Protocol macros are being prepared (see note
1).
Not lit Hardware error in Serial Communications Unit.
ERH Red Lit CPU Unit error, or this Unit has not been regis-
tered in the I/O table. Routing tables incor-
rectly registered in the Unit.
Flashing System Setup error (see note 1)
Not lit CPU Unit is operating normally and the Setup
Area settings are normal.
69
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
Unit Number Switch Set the CPU Bus Unit unit number for the Unit. The CIO Area and DM Area
are allocated according to the unit number setting. The words that are allo-
cated are used for the software switches, Status Area, and the System Setup.
Set the unit number between 0 and F. The factory setting is for unit number 0.
RS-422A/485 Port The specifications of the RS-422A/485 port are the same as those for the RS-
422A/485 port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-422A/485 Port
on page 64.
RS-232C Port The specifications of the RS-232C are the same as those for the RS-232C
port on the Serial Communications Board. See RS-232C Ports on page 63.
70
Component Names and Functions Section 2-1
SCU21-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1
3456 UNIT
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
PORT1
90
PORT2
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
31 65
SCU31-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
TERM
OFF ON 3456 UNIT
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
WIRE
2 4
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
90
PORT2
(RS422
/485)
TERM
OFF ON
WIRE
2 4
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
31 65
SCU41-V1
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
TERM
OFF ON 3456 UNIT
EF 2
789A
01
BCD NO.
WIRE
2 4
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
90
PORT2
71
Data Exchange with the CPU Unit Section 2-2
25 words
Status
CIO 1999
D32099
Port Settings
Auxiliary Area Change Bits
(see note 2)
A636
Restart Bits
A608
Error Information
A424 Error information
Note 1. Set the Serial Communications Board mode and the communications set-
tings (System Setup) in the words allocated in the DM Area. Use a Pro-
gramming Device, such as a Programming Console or the CX-
Programmer, to make these settings. The System Setup is transferred to
the Serial Communications Board at the following times:
• When the power to the CPU Unit is turned ON, when the Serial Com-
munications Board is restarted (A60800 is turned ON), or when the
STUP(237) instruction is executed.
• When the Port 1 Port Settings Change Bit (A63601) or Port 2 Port Set-
tings Change Bit (A63602) is turned ON.
2. When STUP(237) is executed, the CPU Unit automatically turns ON the
Port 1 or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit and updates the System Setup.
For details on the STUP(237) instruction, see Appendix O Changing Com-
munications Port Settings Using STUP(237).
72
Data Exchange with the CPU Unit Section 2-2
Unit No. : 0
CPU Bus Unit Area in CIO Area Local memory
CIO 1500 Software switches
CIO 1501
Unit No. 0 25 words 25 words
Status
CIO 1524
CIO 1525
CIO 1526
25 words
Unit No. 1
CIO 1549
CIO 1875
CIO 1899
D30199
D31500
D31599
Port Settings
Auxiliary Area Change Bits
(see note 2)
Unit No. 0 A620
Unit No. 1 A621
Note 1. Set the Serial Communications Unit mode and the communications set-
tings (System Setup) in the words allocated in the DM Area. Use a Pro-
gramming Device, such as a Programming Console or the CX-
Programmer, to make these settings. The System Setup is transferred to
the Serial Communications Unit at the following times:
• When the power to the CPU Unit is turned ON, when the Serial Com-
munications Unit is restarted (a bit between A50100 to A50115 is
turned ON), or when the STUP(237) instruction is executed.
73
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
• When the Port 1 Port Settings Change Bit (a bit between A62001 to
A63501 (see note a)) or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit (a bit between
A62002 to A63502 (see note b)) is turned ON.
Note a) Bits are allocated in the following order: Unit number 0: A62001,
unit number 1: A62101, unit number 2: A62201, and so on through
unit number F: A63501.
b) Bits are allocated in the following order: Unit number 0: A62002,
unit number 1: A62102, unit number 2: A62202 and so on through
unit number F: A63502.
2. When STUP(237) is executed, the CPU Unit automatically turns ON the
Port 1 or Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit and updates the System Setup.
For details on the STUP(237) instruction, see Appendix O Changing Com-
munications Port Settings Using STUP(237).
2-3-1 DM Area
Serial Communications The Setup Area allocated in the DM Area consists of 20 words between
Boards (CS Series Only) D32000 and D32767, except for the Modbus-RTU slave mode, which uses 40
words for the Setup Area. These words are used to set the serial communica-
tions mode, communications specifications, and other settings for the Serial
Communications Board.
The 20 words from D32000 to D32009 and D32020 to D32029 are used for
port 1, and the 20 words from D32010 to D32019 and D32030 to D32039 are
used for port 2. The remaining words are reserved for the system.
Setup Area Allocated in the DM Area
D32000 to D32767
Words Usage
D32000 to D32009 Port 1 Settings
D32010 to D32019 Port 2 Settings
D32020 to D32029 Port 1 Settings for Modbus-RTU slave mode
D32030 to D32039 Port 2 Settings for Modbus-RTU slave mode
D32040 to D32767 Reserved for the system
74
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Serial Communications The Setup Area allocated in the DM Area is used to set the serial communica-
Units (CS/CJ Series) tions mode, communications specifications, and other settings for the Serial
Communications Units. The words from D30000 to D31599 (100 words per
Unit × 16 Units) are allocated according to the unit number settings.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Unit No. Words
Unit No. 0 D30000 to D30099
m to m + 9: Port 1 Settings
Unit No. 1 D30100 to D30199 m + 10 to m + 19: Port 2 Settings
Unit No. 2 D30200 to D30299 m + 20 to m + 29: Port 1 Settings for Modbus-
Unit No. 3 D30300 to D30399 RTU slave mode
m + 30 to m + 39: Port 1 Settings for Modbus-
Unit No. 4 D30400 to D30499 RTU slave mode
Unit No. 5 D30500 to D30599 m + 40 to m + 99: Reserved for the system
Setting the Setup Areas The following methods can be used to set the Unit settings in the Setup
Areas.
• Use a Programming Device, such as a Programming Console (see note
a), CX-Protocol, or CX-Programmer.
• Use the STUP(237) instruction (see note b) in the ladder diagram pro-
gram. If it is necessary to change the System Setup while the ladder dia-
gram program is being executed, use this method to change the System
Setup.
Note a) If settings are changed from a Programming Device, cycle the
power to the CPU Unit, use a Restart Bit to restart the Unit or
Board, or use the Port Settings Change Bits to restart the port. Re-
fer to 2-2 Data Exchange with the CPU Unit for the specific ad-
dresses to use.
b) For the procedure used to change the System Setup using the
STUP(237) instruction, refer to Appendix R Changing Communi-
cations Port Settings Using STUP(237).
The usage of the System Setup differs according to the serial communica-
tions mode. For details, refer to the following sections.
Host Link communications: Section 4 Using Host Link Communications.
Protocol macros: Section 5 Using Protocol Macros.
1:N NT Links: Section 8 Using 1:N NT Links.
Loopback test: Section 10 Loopback Test.
75
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Setup Area
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Words Bit Setting contents
Board Unit
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m + 10 15 Port settings (see note 1) 0: Defaults; 1: User settings
12 to 14 Reserved
08 to 11 Serial communications mode (see note 2)
0 hex: Default (Host Link); 2 hex: 1:N NT Links (see note 3); 3 hex:
No-protocol; 5 hex: Host Link; 6 hex: Protocol macro; 9 hex: Serial
Gateway; A hex: Modbus-RTU slave; F hex: Loopback test
05 to 07 Reserved
04 Start bits
0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (1 start bit is always used regardless of this setting)
03 Data length 0: 7 bits; 1: 8 bits
02 Stop bits 0: 2 bits; 1: 1 bit
01 Parity 0: Yes; 1: No
00 Parity 0: Even; 1: Odd
D32001 D32011 m + 1 m + 11 04 to 15 Reserved
00 to 03 Baud rate (Unit: bps) (see note 4)
0 hex: Default (9,600); 3 hex: 1,200; 4 hex: 2,400; 5 hex: 4,800; 6 hex:
9,600; 7 hex: 19,200;
8 hex: 38,400; 9 hex: 57,600; A hex: 115,200
Note: The maximum baud rates depend on the Unit version, as
listed in the following table.
Unit Serial communications Maximum baud rate
version mode setting (bits/s)
Pre-Ver. 1.2 Host Link or Loopback test A hex: 115,200
Units
Protocol macro 8 hex: 38,400
NT Link 0 to 9 hex: Standard NT Link
A hex: High-speed NT Link
Unit Ver. 1.2 Host Link, Serial gateway, or A hex: 115,200
or later Loopback test
No-protocol or Protocol macro 9 hex: 57,600
NT Link 0 to 9 hex: Standard NT Link
A hex: High-speed NT Link
Unit Ver. 1.3 Modbus-RTU slave A hex: 115,200
or later
76
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
77
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Note 1. The default settings used for Host Link, protocol macro, and loopback test
modes areas follows: Baud rate: 9,600 bps, start bits: 1 bit, data length: 7
bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 2 bits.
The default settings used for Modbus-RTU slave mode are as follows:
Baud rate: 19,200 bps, data length: 8 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 1 bits.
2. A System Setup error will occur if 1, 3, 4, or 7 to E is set, and the Unit will
operate with the default Host Link settings (9,600 bps, unit number 00).
3. The PTs connected to the port must also be set for a 1:N NT Link. Com-
munications will not be possible if a PT is set for a 1:1 NT Link.
4. Do not set B to F settings, and baud rates that are not supported by the
serial communications mode. A System Setup error will result. Settings of
1 and 2 are reserved for the system and should not be used.
5. With CTS control, turn ON the request to send (RTS) signal before stating
to send, and be sure the clear to send (CTS) signal is ON before sending
data. When there is no CTS control, turn ON the request to send (RTS) sig-
nal before sending, and then send data without checking the request to
send (RTS) signal.
6. For settings below 00C8, use 00C8 Hex; for settings above 03E8, use
03E8 Hex.
78
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Serial Communications Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for the Soft-
Boards (CS Series Only) ware Switches and Status Area. CIO 1900 contains software switches, and
the 24 words from CIO 1901 to CIO 1924 are used for the Status Area.
Inner Board CIO Area
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words Usage
CIO 1900 Software switch
CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status
CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 Port 1 status
CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Port 2 status
CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Reserved for the system
Serial Communications Words are allocated in the CIO Area for Software Switches and Status Area.
Units (CS/CJ Series) Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are
allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25
words. The first word is used for Software Switches, and the remaining 24
words are used for the Status Area.
CPU Bus Unit Area
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Unit No. Words
Unit No. 0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
n: Software switches (Ports 1 and 2)
Unit No. 1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 n + 1 to n + 4: Unit status
Unit No. 2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 n + 5 to n + 14: Port 1 status
Unit No. 3 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 n + 15 to n + 24: Port 2 status
Unit No. 4 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
Unit No. 5 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
Unit No. 6 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
Unit No. 7 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
Unit No. 8 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
Unit No. 9 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
Unit No. A CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
Unit No. B CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
Unit No. C CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
Unit No. D CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
Unit No. E CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
Unit No. F CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
79
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Software Switches Software Switches are used to output control signals from the CPU Unit to the
Serial Communications Board or Unit. The software switches are used for
loopback tests and to abort, release wait status, and control other functions
for protocol macros. For details on the software switch functions, refer to Sec-
tion 5 Using Protocol Macros and Section 10 Loopback Test.
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Function
Board Unit
(CS (CS/
only) CJ)
CIO n 15 Port 2 Reserved
1900 14 Loopback Test Switch (loopback tests)
1: Start, 0: Stop
13 Reserved
12 Serial Gateway Prohibited Switch (protocol mac-
ros)
1: Prohibited, 0: Not prohibited
11 Abort Switch (protocol macros)
1: Abort, 0: Aborted
10 One-shot Trace Switch (protocol macros, see
note)
1: Start, 0: Stop
09 Continuous Trace Switch
(protocol macros, see note)
1: Start, 0: Stop
08 Wait Release Switch (protocol macros)
1: Release wait, 0: Wait released
07 Port 1 Reserved
06 Loopback Test Switch (loopback tests)
1: Start, 0: Stop
05 Reserved
04 Serial Gateway Prohibited Switch (protocol mac-
ros)
1: Prohibited, 0: Not prohibited
03 Abort Switch (protocol macros)
1: Abort, 0: Aborted
02 One-shot Trace Switch (protocol macros, see
note)
1: Start, 0: Stop
01 Continuous Trace Switch
(protocol macros, see note)
1: Start, 0: Stop
00 Wait Release Switch (protocol macros)
1: Release wait, 0: Wait released
Note The One-shot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace Switch are used for the
Serial Communications Board/Unit only when executing traces from the CX-
Protocol in protocol macro mode. Do not manipulate these switches from a
ladder diagram.
Status Area The Status Area is used for status information input from Serial Communica-
tions Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Com-
munications Board or Unit sets communications status, the transmission
control signal status, the transmission error status, and the protocol status.
80
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
81
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Note 1. The port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area is read. For
details on the contents that are read, see 2-3-1 DM Area. If a System Set-
up error occurs, the default settings will be read.
2. The port types for the Serial Communications Board or Unit and the termi-
nating resistance switch setting are read.
3. Turned ON if an overrun error (bit 04), a framing error (bit 03), or a parity
error (bit 02) occurs with the Host Link mode. If any of the error bits 00 to
14 turns ON in the protocol macro mode but then communications are re-
covered within the specified number of retries, the bit will turn OFF. The bit
will remain ON if recovery is not possible within the specified number of re-
tries.
4. Used only with protocol macros. Not used with any other serial communi-
cations mode.
5. Used with protocol macros or Serial Gateway. This bit turns ON (is set to
1) if an error occurs in the transmission path while using the Serial Gate-
way. With Modbus-RTU slave mode, this bit turns ON if there is a CRC er-
ror.
6. Used with protocol macros or Serial Gateway. This bit turns ON (is set to
1) if a send start timeout or response timeout occurs while using the Serial
Gateway.
7. Not used with NT Links or loopback tests. This bit also turns ON (is set to
1) if 260 bytes or more are stored in the reception buffer during no-protocol
communications.
8. Not used with NT Links or loopback tests.
Protocol Status The protocol status is used in protocol macro mode, NT Link mode, or loop-
back tests. It is not used with other modes. The contents depend on the serial
communications mode, as shown in the following tables.
82
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
NT Links
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Board Unit
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO CIO n+9 n + 19 08 to 15 PT Priority Registered Flag
1909 1919 00 to 07 PT Communications Flag
CIO CIO n + 10 to n + 20 to 00 to 15 Reserved
1910 to 1920 to n + 14 n + 24
CIO CIO
1914 1924
83
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Loopback Tests
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Board Unit
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO CIO n+9 n + 19 15 Test 1: Error; 0: Normal
1909 1919 09 to 14 status Reserved
08 1: DSR (DR) signal check error; 0: Nor-
mal
07 1: CTS (CS) signal check error; 0: Nor-
mal
06 Reserved
05 1: Timeout error; 0: Normal
04 1: Parity error; 0: Normal
03 1: Overrun error; 0: Normal
02 1: Framing error; 0: Normal
01 Reserved
00 1: Conveyor error; 0: Normal
CIO CIO n + 10 n + 20 00 to 15 Number of tests executed
1910 1920
CIO CIO n+11 n+21 00 to 15 Number of test errors
1911 1921
CIO CIO n + 12 to n + 22 to 00 to 15 Reserved
1912 to 1922 to n + 14 n + 24
CIO CIO
1914 1924
No-protocol Mode
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Board Unit
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
--- --- n + 09 n + 19 15 to 08 Reserved
07 Reception Overflow Flag
1: Board/Unit has received the specified num-
ber of bytes or more
0: Board/Unit has not received the specified
number of bytes or more
06 Reception Completed Flag
1: Reception completed; 0: No reception or
reception in progress
05 TXDU(256) Executing Flag
1: Executing; 0: Not executing
04 to 00 Reserved
--- --- n + 10 n + 20 15 to 00 Receive counter (number of receive data bytes)
The number of bytes of received data between
0 and 256 bytes is indicated using 0000 to 0100
hex.
84
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
85
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Note 1. When any one of bits 04 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag)
(non-fatal error) will be ON.
2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON.
3. This bit turns ON if a TXD(236)/RXD(235) instruction is sent during no-pro-
tocol communications to an Inner Board that does not support no-protocol
mode (no Unit Ver. indicated).
For details on each type of error, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting and
Maintenance.
Restart Bit: A60800
The Restart Bit can be turned ON and then OFF to restart the Serial Commu-
nications Board without turning OFF the PLC power supply.
Bit Function
A60800 Inner Board Restart Bit
86
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
87
I/O Memory Allocations Section 2-3
Restart Bit
A Restart Bit can be turned ON and then OFF to restart the Serial Communi-
cations Board without turning OFF the PLC power supply.
Unit Function
A50100 Unit No. 0 Restart Bit
A50101 Unit No. 1 Restart Bit
A50102 Unit No. 2 Restart Bit
A50103 Unit No. 3 Restart Bit
A50104 Unit No. 4 Restart Bit
A50105 Unit No. 5 Restart Bit
A50106 Unit No. 6 Restart Bit
A50107 Unit No. 7 Restart Bit
A50108 Unit No. 8 Restart Bit
A50109 Unit No. 9 Restart Bit
A50110 Unit No. A Restart Bit
A50111 Unit No. B Restart Bit
A50112 Unit No. C Restart Bit
A50113 Unit No. D Restart Bit
A50114 Unit No. E Restart Bit
A50115 Unit No. F Restart Bit
88
SECTION 3
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to mounting the Serial Communications Board and Serial Communications Units, and how to
connect the ports to external devices.
89
Installing a Serial Communications Board Section 3-1
Note 1. Always turn OFF the power before installing or removing the Serial Com-
munications Board. Installing or removing the Serial Communications
Board with the power ON can cause the CPU Unit to malfunction, damage
internal components, or cause communications errors.
2. Before handling the Serial Communications Board, touch a grounded me-
tallic object in order to discharge any static build-up from your body.
1,2,3... 1. Press the catches at the top and bottom of the Inner Board compartment
cover.
90
Installing Serial Communications Units Section 3-2
-V1
Port cover
91
Installing Serial Communications Units Section 3-2
1,2,3... 1. Mount the Unit to the Backplane by hooking the top of the Unit into the slot
on the Backplane and rotating the Unit downwards.
Hook
Backplane
2. Make sure that the connector on the back of the Unit is properly inserted
into the connector in the Backplane.
3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw on the bottom of the Unit.
The screwdriver must be held at a slight angle, so be sure to leave enough
space below the Rack.
Duct
20 mm min.
CPU Unit
I/O Power Backplane
Supply Unit
Remote I/O
Rack
20 mm min.
Duct
Phillips
screwdriver
92
Installing Serial Communications Units Section 3-2
PA205R
EF 2
789A
01
NO.
BCD
WIRE
2 4
MCPWR
L1 BUSY
PORT1
AC100-240V (RS422
INPUT /485)
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT2
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
PORT
2. Slide the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit until they lock the Units
together.
Slider
PA205R
POWER SYSMAC
CJ1G-CPU44
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
SCU41
RUN
RDY
ERC
ERH
SD1 RD1 TER1 Lock
PROGRAMMABLE SD2 RD2
PRPHL
CONTROLLER
COMM TERM
OFF ON
3456 UNIT
Release
EF 2
OPEN
789A
01
NO.
BCD
WIRE
2 4
MCPWR
L1 BUSY PORT1
AC100-240V (RS422
INPUT /485)
L2/N
PERIPHERAL
PORT2
RUN
OUTPUT
AC240V
DC24V
PORT
Note If the sliders are not locked properly, the Serial Communications Units may
not function correctly.
To remove the Unit, move the sliders to the release position and then pull the
Units gently apart.
93
Installing Serial Communications Units Section 3-2
Port cover
CJ-series Unit
Remove label after wiring.
SCU41
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
NO.
BCD
WIRE
2 4
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
PORT2
Port cover
94
Wiring Section 3-3
3-3 Wiring
3-3-1 Wiring Precautions
• Before connecting or disconnecting the communications cables, always
make sure that the PLC is turned OFF.
• Tighten the communications connector screws firmly with your fingers.
• Serial Communications Boards and Units can be connected to various
devices. For compatibility, refer to the operation manuals for the devices
to which they are to be connected.
The following sections describe the connection methods used for each serial
communications mode of the Serial Communications Board and Unit ports.
Note 1. The NT-AL001-E Link Adapter can be used to convert between RS-232C
and RS-422A/485 to enable 1:N communications.
2. Use 4-wire connections between Link Adapters.
95
Wiring Section 3-3
RS-422A/485 Ports This layout applies to the following ports: port 2 of the CS1W-SCB41-V1,
ports 1 and 2 of the CS1W-SCU31-V1, ports 1 and 2 of the CJ1W-SCU31-V1,
and port 1 of the CJ1W-SCU41-V1.
Pin Abbreviation Signal name I/O
1 SDA Send data - Output
2 SDB Send data + Output
3 NC Unused ---
4 NC Unused ---
5 NC Unused ---
6 RDA Receive data - Input
7 NC Unused ---
8 RDB Receive data + Input
9 NC Unused ---
Hood FG Shield ---
Note When the 2-wire connections are used, use either pins 1 and 2, or pins 6 and
8.
Refer to 2-1 Component Names and Functions for signal precautions.
The internal circuits are shown in the following diagram.
51 KΩ
Port 2
4.7 KΩ
Pin 8
Receiver
Terminating resistance: 220 Ω ∗
4.7 KΩ Terminating resistance switch
51 KΩ
Pin 6
96
Wiring Section 3-3
Note The signal names SDA/B and RDA/B do not always have the same polarity as
that shown above. Check the polarity of the external device before making
connections.
Backplane connector
Backplane connector
Cable connector Cable connector
123 123
223 223
65
123 150
223
Note The mounting heights shown above are applicable when the attached con-
nectors, connector covers, and recommended cables are used. The mounting
height may differ when other connectors, connector covers, and cables are
used. Determine the mounting height, taking into account the connectors,
connector covers, and the minimum bending radius of the cables.
97
Wiring Section 3-3
Low-current cables
Communications
cables
Control cables 300 mm min.
PLC power supply
and general control
circuit wiring Power cables 300 mm min.
Power lines
• If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they
must be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
PLC power supply
and general control
Communications circuit wiring Power lines Steel sheet metal
cables
200 mm min.
Note 1. Use the same transmission circuit (2-wire or 4-wire) for all nodes.
2. Do not use 4-wire connections when the 2/4-wire switch on the Board is
set to 2-wire.
3. In protocol macro mode, do not use full-duplex transmissions when the 2/
4-wire switch on the Unit is set to 2-wire. Otherwise, the data sent from the
Serial Communications Board or Unit will be directly returned as receive
data. In this case, the Board or Unit cannot determine whether the data in
the reception buffer is its own send data or the data received from a remote
node, and thus cannot perform receive processing properly. To avoid this
problem, always use half-duplex transmissions with a 2-wire setting. Either
half-duplex or full-duplex transmissions can be used with a 4-wire setting.
98
Wiring Section 3-3
Note When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, turn OFF pin 5 and
turn ON pin 6.
99
Wiring Section 3-3
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic
connection diagrams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermea-
sures be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-
pair cables. Refer to 3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring for actual wiring
methods.
Serial Communications
Computer Shield NT-AL001-E Link Adapter NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Board or Unit
RS-232C
(See note)
Signal RS-232C Pin Signal Signal Pin RS-422A Pin Signal Signal Pin Pin Signal
FG NC NC FG
SD SD SD SD
RD RD RD RD
RS-232C RTS RTS RTS RTS RS-232C
Interface CTS CTS CTS CTS Interface
5V 5V 5V
DSR DSR DSR DSR
DTR DTR DTR DTR
SG SG SG SG
D-sub, 9-pin
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block D-sub, 9-pin connector (male)
connector (male) connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
5-V (+) connector (male)
power (-)
DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance) (terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF Pin 6: ON
100
Wiring Section 3-3
!Caution Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything but the
NT-AL001-E Link Adapter. Using this power supply for any other external
device may damage the Serial Communications Board/Unit or the external
device.
Serial Communications
Computer NT-AL001-E Link Adapter NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Board/Unit
RS-232C
Signal Shield Pin Signal Signal Pin Pin Signal Signal Pin Signal
RS-422A (See note) Pin
FG NC NC FG
SD SD SD SD
RD RD RD RD
RS-232C RS-232C
RTS RTS RTS Interface
Interface RTS
CTS CTS CTS CTS
5V 5V 5V
DSR DSR DSR DSR
DTR DTR DTR DTR
SG SG SG SG
D-sub, 9-pin
DIP Switch Settings connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block
connector (male) Pin 1: ON
5-V (+) Pin 2: OFF
power (-) Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
DIP Switch Settings Pin 5: OFF
Pin 1: ON Pin 6: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance) Serial Communications
Pin 3: OFF NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Board/Unit
Pin 4: OFF RS-232C
Pin 5: OFF Pin Signal Signal Pin Pin Signal
Pin 6: OFF (See note)
NC FG
SD SD
RD RD
RS-232C
RTS RTS Interface
CTS CTS
5V 5V
DSR DSR
DTR DTR
SG SG
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
101
Wiring Section 3-3
102
Wiring Section 3-3
Serial Communications
B500-AL001 Link Adapter Board/Unit
Computer NT-AL001-E Link Adapter Shield
Pin Signal Signal Pin Pin Signal
Signal Pin Signal Signal Pin
Shield RS-422A/
FG NC RS-422A/ 485 Inter-
SD 485 Inter- face
SD face
RS-232C RD RD
Interface RTS RTS Hood
CTS CTS
4-wire
5V Signal Terminating resistance OFF
DSR DSR Pin
DTR DTR D-sub, 9-pin
SG SG connector (male)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit
Computer NT-AL001-E Link Adapter
Shield RS-422A Pin Signal
Signal Pin Signal Signal Pin
RS-232C RS-422A/
FG NC 485 Inter-
face
SD SD
RS-232C RD RD
Interface RTS RTS Hood
CTS CTS
4-wire
5V Terminating resistance OFF
DSR DSR
DTR DTR
SG SG
103
Wiring Section 3-3
• Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link)
NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only)
• OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
1:1 Connections from RS-422A/485 to RS-422A/485 Ports
Serial Communications
Board/Unit (See note 2.)
PT
Short bar Signal
Signal Pin
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male) Hood
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link)
NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only)
104
Wiring Section 3-3
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male) FG
Terminal block or D-sub
connector
(See note 2.)
Short bar
Signal
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
FG
Terminal block or D-sub
connector
D-sub, 9-pin FG
connector (male)
Terminal block or D-sub connector
(See note 2.)
Short bar
Signal
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
FG
Terminal block or D-sub connector
105
Wiring Section 3-3
RS-232C
interface
NT-AL001-E NT-AL001-E
Resistance ON
5-V power
RS-232C RS-422A/485
Resistance RS-232C
ON interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C RS-422A/485
Resistance RS-422A/
ON 485
interface
RS-232C RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
interface
NT-AL001-E B500-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistance RS-422A
ON /485
Resistance ON
RS-232C
NT-AL001-E interface
NT-AL001-E
RS-232C
Resistance RS-232C
ON
RS-422A/485 RS-232C
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
106
Wiring Section 3-3
RS-232C
NT-AL001-E interface
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
Resistance ON
5-V power
RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON
Resistance ON
RS-422A/485
interface
B500-AL001-E
RS-422A/485
Resistance
ON
Resistance ON
RS-232C
NT-AL001-E interface
RS-232C
Resistance
ON
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
Resistance ON
5-V power
Note 1. The maximum cable length for RS-232C is 15 m. The RS-232C standard,
however, does not cover baud rates above 19.2 Kbps. Refer to the manual
for the device being connected to confirm support.
2. The combined cable length for RS-422A/485 is 500 m including branch
lines.
3. The maximum cable length is limited to 2 m when an NT-AL001-E Link
Adapter is connected.
4. Branch lines must be a maximum of 10 m long.
107
Wiring Section 3-3
Connection Examples
The connection examples in the remainder of this section show only the basic
connection diagrams. We recommend that appropriate noise countermea-
sures be taken in actual applications, including the use of shielded twisted-
pair cables. Refer to 3-4 RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring for actual wiring
methods.
108
Wiring Section 3-3
ST2
RT
DTR
CI
ST1
109
Wiring Section 3-3
DIP SW
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Terminating
resistance
Pin 3: OFF 4-wire
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF Device supporting
Pin 6: ON RS-422A/485
Serial Communications communications
Unit or Board NT-AL001-E (2-wire)
RS-232C
Signal Pin Shield Pin Signal Signal Pin Signal RS-422A
/485
FG NC interface
SD SD
RD RD
RS-232C
interface RTS RTS
CTS CTS
5V 5V
DSR
Device supporting
DSR RS-422A/485
DTR DTR communications
SG SG (2-wire)
D-sub, 9-pin (See note)
connector (male) D-sub, 9-pin Terminal block Signal RS-422A
/485
connector (male) interface
DIP SW
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON Terminating
resistance
Pin 3: ON 2-wire
Pin 4: ON
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
110
Wiring Section 3-3
Hood Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
5-V (+)
power (-)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
111
Wiring Section 3-3
Hood
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
D-sub, 9-pin (2-wire)
connector (male)
Signal RS-422A/
485 inter-
face Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
Serial Communications Board/Unit Shield (4-wire)
Device supporting
RS-422A/485
communications
(4-wire)
Shield Signal
RS-422A/
485 inter-
face
112
Wiring Section 3-3
Serial Communications
Board or Unit PT
• Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link)
NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only)
• OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
RS-422A/
RS-422
485 Inter- A/485
face Inter-
face
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male) FG
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
(See note 2.)
Short bar PT
Signal
RS-422A
/485 In -
terface
FG
Terminal block or
D-sub connector
113
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
Hood
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male) FG
Terminal block
RS-422A
/485 In-
terface
FG
Terminal block
114
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
XM2S-0911-E
Note The Hood (FG) is internally connected to the ground terminal (GR) on the
Power Supply Unit via the CPU Rack or Expansion Rack. Therefore, FG is
grounded by grounding the ground terminal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit.
Although there is conductivity between the Hood (FG) and pin 1 (FG), connect
the Hood (FG) to the shield because the Hood (FG) has smaller contact resis-
tance with the shield than pin 1 (FG), and thus provides better noise resis-
tance.
CS-series PLC CJ-series PLC
Serial
Serial Communications Board/Unit Communications
Power Supply Unit Unit
Power Supply Unit
PA205R SCU41
RUN ERC SD1 RD1 TER1
SCU21 RUN
POWER
PA204S SYSMAC RUN
ERR/ALM
RUN RDY POWER CJ1G-CPU44 INH SD2 RD2
ERR/ALM PROGRAMMABLE RDY ERH
ERC ERH
CONTROLLER PRPHL
SD1 SD2 INH COMM
TERM
RD1 RD2
PRPHL/COMN OFF ON 4
23 56
UNIT
EF01
789A
NO.
WIRE BCD
SYSMAC CS1G OPEN 2 4
PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER
F0 12
E
CPU42
PORT1
MCPWR (RS422
L2/N
AC100V-120V/ L1 BUSY /485)
OPEN
AC2100-240V/ AC100-240V
INPUT
L1
INPUT
MCPWR BUSY L2/N
OPEN 100-200
CLOSE
200-240
PORT1 OPEN
GR GR PERIFHERAL
PORT2
PERIPHERAL
RUN
OUTPUT
DC24V/0.8A AC240V
OUTPUT DC24V
PORT2
115
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
2. Connect the shield of the communications cable to the Hood (FG) of the
RS-422A/485 connector on the Serial Communications Board or Unit. At
the same time, ground the ground (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Unit
on the CPU Rack or CS Expansion Rack to 100 Ω or less.
Note Always ground the shield only at the Board/Unit end. Grounding both ends of
the shield may damage the device due to the potential difference between the
ground terminals.
Connection examples are shown below.
2-Wire Connections
Serial Communications Remote device
Board/Unit
Hood
Shield
4-Wire Connections
Serial Communications
Board/Unit Remote device
Hood
Shield
RS-422
interface
Hood
Signal
Pin
Remote device
Signal
116
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
FG
117
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
EF01
789A
NO.
WIRE BCD
SYSMAC CS1G OPEN 2 4
PROGRAMABLE CONTROLLER
F0 12
E
CPU42
PORT1
MCPWR (RS422
L2/N
AC100V-120V/ L1 BUSY /485)
OPEN
AC2100-240V/ AC100-240V
INPUT
L1
INPUT
MCPWR BUSY L2/N
OPEN 100-200
CLOSE
200-240
PORT1 OPEN
GR GR PERIFHERAL
PORT2
PERIPHERAL
RUN
OUTPUT
DC24V/0.8A AC240V
OUTPUT DC24V
PORT2
4. Be sure to turn ON the terminating resistance at the last Unit at the end of
the RS-422A/485 cable.
Cable Preparation
See the following diagrams for the length of the cable portion to be cut in each
step.
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be
careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25 mm (RS-422A)
40 mm (RS-232C)
3. Trim off the braided shield using scissors so that the remaining shield
length is 10 mm.
10 mm
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the ex-
posed conductor length is 5 mm.
5 mm
118
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
2. Remove the specified length of the sheath from the cable using a knife. Be
careful not to scratch the braided shield.
25 mm (RS-422A)
40 mm (RS-232C)
4. Remove the insulation from each conductor using a stripper so that the ex-
posed conductor length is 5 mm.
5 mm
5. Wrap adhesive tape around the conductor from which the braided shield
was removed.
Adhesive tape
3-4-4 Soldering
1,2,3... 1. Thread a heat-shrinking tube through each conductor.
2. Temporarily solder each conductor to the corresponding connector termi-
nals.
3. Completely solder each conductor.
119
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrinking tube
Inside diameter:
1.5 mm, l = 10
4. Return the heat-shrinking tube to the soldered portion, then heat the tube
to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrinking tube
Adhesive tape
End connected to FG
End not connected to FG
Aluminum foil tape
Grounding plate
120
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
CJ-series Unit
121
RS-232C and RS-422A/485 Wiring Section 3-4
122
SECTION 4
Using Host Link Communications
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use Host Link communications.
123
Host Link Communications Section 4-1
Host-initiated Communications in a Host Link System are normally started by the host com-
Communications puter.
Command
Host computer CS/CJ-series PLC
Response
The host computer sends a command to the PLC. The PLC processes the
command and returns a response to the host computer. This process is
repeated, allowing the host computer to monitor and control PLC operation.
Both C-mode and FINS commands can be used in host-initiated communica-
tions.
PLC-initiated The PLC can also initiate communications with the host computer, as may be
Communications necessary when errors occur on the line controlled by the PLC or to confirm
the operating status of the host computer.
Command
Host computer CS/CJ-series PLC
Response
The PLC sends a command to the host computer through a Serial Communi-
cations Unit or Board. The host computer processes the command and, when
necessary, returns a response to the PLC.
Using PLC-initiated communications requires that a program be prepared on
the host computer to process commands received from a PLC and return the
required responses. Only FINS commands can be used in PLC-initiated com-
munications.
Note Always transfer uppercase letters when using Host Link communications.
Lowercase letters cannot be processed.
124
Setup Area Allocations Section 4-2
125
Setup Area Allocations Section 4-2
Port Settings The setting for the port settings determine if the default settings or user set-
tings will be used for port 1 and port 2. Be sure to use the same settings as
the RS-232C port on the host computer connected via the Host Link System.
If the default port settings are specified, then the setting of bits 00 to 04 and
the baud rate in D32001 will be ignored.
The default settings used are as follows: Baud rate: 9,600 bps, start bits:
1 bit, data length: 7 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 2 bits.
If user port settings are specified, set bits 00 to 04 and set the baud rate in
D32001.
Setting Example: 0100 Hex = Host link mode with default port settings.
Serial Communications Set the serial communications mode to 5 Hex to use Host Link communica-
Mode tions. The default setting of 0 Hex can also be used to operate in Host Link
mode with unit number 00.
126
Setup Area Allocations Section 4-2
Start Bits, Data Length, If user settings are specified for the port settings, the number of start bits, data
Stop Bits, Parity, Baud length, number of stop bits, parity, and baud rate must be set. The start bits
Rate setting, however, will be ignored and 1 start bit will always be used.
Do not set the baud rate setting to between B and F. A setup error will occur if
these settings are used, and the default setting of 9,600 bps will be used. Do
not use setting 1 and 2, which are reserved for the system.
Send Delay If response frames cannot be completely received regardless of the communi-
cations processing used at the host computer, a send delay can be set for the
response. Any setting higher than 7530 Hex will be treated as 7530 Hex.
Case 1
Host computer
Command sent Send delay
Case 2
Host computer
Delimiter Send delay
Case 3
CTS Control If CTS control is enabled, the RTS signal is turned ON before starting to trans-
fer and then the send is started after confirming that the CTS signal is ON. If
CTS control is not enabled, the RTS signal is turned ON before starting to
transfer and then the send is started without checking the status of the CTS
signal.
127
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 4-3
RTS = ON RTS = ON
N
CTS = ON?
Y
N N
One character sent One character sent
All All
characters characters
sent? sent?
Y Y
Host Link Unit Number Set the setting to 00 to 1F Hex to set Host Link unit numbers 0 to 31.
128
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 4-3
Inner Board Error A424 contains error information for the Serial Communications Board.
Information (CS-series Word Bit Contents
Serial Communications
A424 12 to 15 Non-fatal Reserved
Board Only) errors
11 1 Error log EEPROM error; 0: Normal
(Note 1)
10 1: Protocol macro execution error; 0: Normal
This bit will be turned ON when code 3, 4, or 5 is
stored in the error code for bits 00 to 03 of CIO 1909
or CIO 1919 in the CIO Area,
09 1: Protocol data error (SUM error); 0: Normal
08 1: Setup error; 0: Normal
07 1: Routing table error; 0: Normal
06 Reserved
05 1: Cyclic monitoring error; 0: Normal
04 Reserved
03 Fatal Reserved
02 errors Reserved
(Note 2)
01 1: Inner Bus error; 0: Normal
00 1: Inner Board watchdog timer error; 0: Normal
Note 1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag)
(non-fatal error) will be ON.
2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON.
For details on errors, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
4-3-2 CIO Area Allocations
Words in the CIO Area are allocated for a Status Area, which contains status
and error information for the Serial Communications Board or Unit. These
allocations are described in this section.
Serial Communications Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for a Status
Boards (CS Series only) Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area
with Host Link communications.
Inner Board CIO Area
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words Usage
CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status
CIO 1905 to CIO 1908 Port 1 status
CIO 1915 to CIO 1918 Port 2 status
Serial Communications Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are
Units (CS/CJ Series) allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25
words. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status
Area with Host Link communications.
129
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 4-3
Status Area The Status Area is used for status information input from Serial Communica-
tions Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Com-
munications Board or Unit set communications status, the transmission
control signal status, and the transmission error status.
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Boards Units
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 Reserved
01 1: Error log EEPROM error 0: Error log EEPROM normal
00 1: Protocol data error 0: Protocol data normal
CIO 1902 n+2 00 to 15 Reserved
CIO 1903 n+3 00 to 15 Reserved
CIO 1904 n+4 00 to 15 Reserved
130
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 4-3
Note The settings in the Setup Area are reflected here. The default settings will be
used and will be stored here if a setup error occurs.
Error Log EEPROM Error This bit will be set to 1 if an error occurs in reading or writing the error log
stored in EEPROM on the assumption that the EEPROM has reached its use-
ful life. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will
also light. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42411 will turn
ON and the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, indicating a non-
fatal error.
Protocol Data Error This bit will be turned ON if a checksum error is detected in the protocol data
at startup. The checksum is checked for all serial communications modes. If a
Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also flash. If
a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42409 will turn ON, the ERR/
ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and the RDY indicator will flash at 1-
second intervals, indicating a non-fatal error.
131
Communications Timing Section 4-4
Port Setting Status The settings in the Setup Area for the following items will be stored: Serial
communications mode, baud rate, start bits, data length, stop bits, parity,
ports, terminating resistance, setup error, and port operating/stopped status.
The port operating/stopped status will always be 1 for Host Link mode.
Communications Status The flow control and buffer status is stored. These bits are cleared at startup
or when a port is restarted using STUP(237) or a Port Settings Change Bit
(Auxiliary Area).
Transmission Control The status of the following transmission control signals is stored: ER signal,
Signal Status DTR signal, CTS signal, and RTS signal. 1: High, 0: Low
Transmission Error Status The Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON if any of the following flags
turn ON: Overrun Error (bit 04), Framing Error (bit 03), or Parity Error (bit 02).
5 Instruction 1
1 Instruction 2
6 Instruction 3
3 Instruction 4
7 Instruction 5
2 Instruction 6
0 Instruction 7
4 Instruction 8
Note 1. If more than eight communications instructions are being used, then exclu-
sive control must be performed to make sure that not more than eight are
executed at the same time. Refer to descriptions of network communica-
tions instructions in the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Refer-
ence Manual (W342).
2. The same communications port numbers are used by both the communi-
cations instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)) and the
PROTOCOL MACRO instruction (PMCR(260)). The same port number
cannot be used by more than one of these instructions at the same time.
132
Communications Timing Section 4-4
Communications Port A Communications Port Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases.
Error Flags • When an error is generated during execution of SEND(090), RECV(098),
or CMND(490).
• When an error response or retry error has been generated for the port.
These Flags will turn OFF when the corresponding Communications Port
Enabled Flag is turned OFF at the start of operation or at the start of execut-
ing the SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490).
Word Bit Content
A219 08 to 15 Reserved
07 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 7
06 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 6
05 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 5
04 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 4
03 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 3
02 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 2
01 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 1
00 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 0
Communications Port The Communications Port Completion Code words will contain the FINS end
Completion Codes code after SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) has been executed.
133
Communications Timing Section 4-4
If the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF when operation is started
or SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) are executed, the contents of
these words will be cleared.
Word Content
A203 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 0
A204 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 1
A205 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 2
A206 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 3
A207 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 4
A208 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 5
A209 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 6
A210 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 7
A211 to A218 Reserved
Flag Transitions
Communications Port
Enabled Flag
Communications Port
Error Flag
Communications Port
Completion Code
(Normal end) (No unit correspond- (Normal end)
End of previous ing to unit address)
processing
No Response Required
134
Communications Timing Section 4-4
Command transmission to the host computer can start even when the port is
receiving a command from the host computer (1). The transmission of a
response to the command from the host computer is postponed until the
transmission of the command to the host computer is completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
No Response Required
At (1) in the diagram, the response to a command sent from the host com-
puter is being transmitted from the port. In this case, the command transmis-
sion to the host computer is postponed until the response transmission is
completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
135
Changes from Previous Products Section 4-5
No Response Required
When response wait time has been set in the command format from the host
computer, commands to the host computer will not be transmitted until the
response time has elapsed (1). Transmission of responses to commands from
the host computer will be postponed until the command transmission to the
host computer has been completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
136
Changes from Previous Products Section 4-5
Systems created with Host Link Units and CPU Units in other PLC product
series. These differences are described in this sections.
137
Changes from Previous Products Section 4-5
Note The number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text
lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-series Host Link
Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units. A host com-
puter program previously used for C-series Host Link Units may not function
correctly if used for CS/CJ-series PLCs. Check the host computer program
before using it and make any corrections required to handle different frame
text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Refer-
ence Manual (W342) for details.
138
Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 4-6
Note For pre-Ver. 1.2 Units, the number of words that can be read and written per
frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-
series Host Link Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/
Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series Host Link Units
may not function correctly if it is used in CS/CJ-series PLCs. When using
Serial Communications Boards/Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later, these pro-
grams can be reused by setting the Host Link compatible device mode to
mode C (C500/120) or mode D (D200H). (Alternatively, check the host com-
puter program before using it and make any corrections required to handle dif-
ferent frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications
Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.)
139
Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 4-6
Note The differences between the command and response frames for 1:N Host
Links and 1:1 Host Links is as follows:
• Response Format
@ 0 0 R D 0 0 × × * CR
140
Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 4-6
• Response Format
R D 0 0 * CR
• When the command for reading the status of the CPU Unit (MS) is
received, the response format that is returned to the host according to the
FAL/FALS instruction execution status is different.
Command Name
MS PROCESSOR STATUS READ
141
Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 4-6
Note 1. The response data formats for MS commands when FAL/FALS is not exe-
cuted are as follows:
Types for which a space (20 hex) is added to the FAL/FALS message in the
response data (indicated as fixed length in the above table).
Types for which a FAL/FALS message is not added to the response data
(indicated as variable length in the above table).
(A FAL/FALS message is added to the response data for both types if FAL/
FALS is executed.)
2. The following condition is an exception:
When reusing the RG command created using a CVM1/CV-series PLC
with mode B selected, the host computer program cannot be reused with-
out being changed. The difference in the response returned when the RG
command is reused and the Timer/Counter Flag for 121 words (maximum
text area) is read is as follows:
Using mode B with a CS/CJ-series First frame
Serial Communications Unit/Board 121 words (including terminator)
with unit version 1.2 or later
142
Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 4-6
143
Host Link Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 4-6
144
SECTION 5
Using Protocol Macros
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use protocol macros.
145
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
Using the Standard When connecting OMRON devices, data is sent and received between the
System Protocols CS/CJ-series CPU Unit and these devices by specifying the sequence num-
ber of the standard system protocol provided in the Serial Communications
Board, Serial Communications Unit, and CX-Protocol, and executing the
sequence using the PROTOCOL MACRO instruction (PMCR(260)).
OMRON devices
Note The devices for which standard system protocols are provided are listed
below. For details, refer to 5-4 Using Protocol Macros.
Digital Controllers (E5@K, ES100@), Temperature Controllers (E5ZE,
E5@J), Intelligent Signal Processors (K3T@), Bar Code Readers (V500/
V520), Laser Micrometers (3Z4L), Visual Inspection Units (F200/F300/
F350), ID Controllers (V600/V620), Hayes Modem AT Command, and de-
vices supporting the CompoWay/F protocol.
Modifying Standard When connecting OMRON devices, if there is no standard system protocol or
System Protocols you wish to modify part of the protocol, use the CX-Protocol to modify the
standard system protocol, transfer this as a separate communications
146
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
Modified standard
Sequence No. system protocol Command execution (SEND, RECV, SEND&RECV)
specification
Messages
Step 0
Sequence
number
Step 1
RS-232C or RS-422A/485
Step 2
Creating a New Protocol When connecting a general-purpose external device that has an RS-232C or
RS-422A/485 port, use the CX-Protocol to create a new protocol containing
the communications specifications for the general-purpose external device,
transfer these specifications to the Serial Communications Board or Unit, and
execute the PMCR(260) instruction.
CPU Unit
Newly created protocol Command execution (SEND, RECV, SEND&RECV)
Messages
Step 0
Sequence Sequence No.
number specification
Step 1
RS232C or RS-422A/485
Step 2
In this manual, the protocol structure is explained in simple terms, and exam-
ples are given of the use of the PMCR(260) instruction when controlling
147
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
OMRON devices using standard system protocols. For details on the proto-
cols, the method of modifying the standard system protocols, and the method
of creating new sequences, refer to the CX-Protocol Operation Manual
(W344).
Messages
RS-232C or
Receive message (Example: Response) RS-422A/485
RECV RX01…
(receive) Header Address Send data Check Terminator
code
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
148
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
Depending on the response received, the user can either choose to resend
the same send message (retry processing), or to perform the next process
(for example, read the process value for a Temperature Controller with a dif-
ferent address).
One protocol
One-step structure
Sequence No. 000 to 999 With the SEND, RECV, or With the WAIT, FLUSH,
(60 sequences max./protocol) SEND&RECV command OPEN, or CLOSE command
Step 0
Transmission Step 0 Step 1
control parameter Command (see Note 1) Command
Link word setting Step 1 (see note 1)
Send/receive Messages (see note 2)
processing
monitoring time
Next process
Response 15 steps max. Y
notification method
15 steps max. Repeated
N (no)
Case No. 00
Receive message Next process
Note 1. The SEND, RECV, SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH (reception buffer clear),
OPEN (ER-ON), or CLOSE (ER-OFF) commands can be used.
2. Three types of reception matrix are available for switching the processing,
depending on whether the messages are send messages, receive (wait)
messages, or multiple receive (wait) messages. Unlike sequences, these
matrixes are managed as lists.
Sequence Parameters
Parameter Meaning
Transmission control parame- Control methods, such as flow control
ters
Link words Settings for shared words between the PLC and the
Serial Communications Board.
Monitoring time Monitoring time for send/receive processing
Response notification method Timing for writing received data to I/O memory in the
PLC
149
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
Step Parameters
Parameter Meaning
Command One of the following: SEND, RECV,
SEND&RECV, WAIT, FLUSH, OPEN, or
CLOSE
Messages Send message The message sent for SEND.
Receive mes- The expected message for RECV.
sage
Send message The message sent and the expected mes-
and receive sage for SEND&RECV.
message
Reception A group of expected messages that can be
matrix used to switch to different next processes
when RECV or SEND&RECV is used.
Repeat counter The number of times to repeat the step (0 to 255). The
repeat counter can be used to change send/receive mes-
sages.
Retry count Used for SEND&RECV to retry the command for errors (0 to
9).
Send wait time Used for SEND or SEND&RECV to create a wait time before
sending data.
Response write Specification of whether or not to write the received data to
enable (for operand memory.
specification)
Next process Specifies the next step or to end the sequence when the cur-
rent step is completed normally.
Error processing Specifies the next step or to end the sequence when the cur-
rent step ends in an error.
150
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
DM Area Settings for The following data is set in the Setup Area in the DM Area for a standard sys-
Standard System Protocol tem protocol.
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
Board Unit Contents Setting for a standard system protocol
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m + 10 Bits 00 to 04: Communications Set to match the parameters of the external
parameters device.
Bits 08 to 11: Serial communica- Set to 6 Hex to specify Protocol Macro Mode.
tions mode
151
Overview of the Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-1
Handling The CS/CJ-series PLCs provide standard system protocols to enable commu-
Communications nications with OMRON components without having to create communications
Problems for Standard sequences. The sequences in the standard system protocols can be executed
System Protocols merely by setting operands for the PMCR(260) instruction.
Processing for communications line problems during communications for the
standard system protocols are set to normal settings, as shown in the follow-
ing table. If these settings are not suitable to the application or if improve-
ments are desired, use the CX-Protocol to modify the following settings in the
required sequences. For details on the use of the CX-Protocol, refer to the
CX-Protocol Operation Manual (W344). Refer to the appendices for the set-
tings in the standard system protocols.
Level Item Possible changes in settings
Sequence Link words No reason to change.
parameters Transmission control
parameters
Response notifica-
tion method
Reception wait time Tr The monitoring times are set to 3 seconds
Reception finished for most sequences. The settings are differ-
wait time Tfr ent for send-only and receive-only
sequences, as well as for sequences that
Send finished wait require time for responses.
time Tfs
Step parame- Repeat counter No reason to change.
ters Command
Retry count The retry count is general set to 3 retries (4
tries total) for sequences that use the
SEND&RECV command. Different settings
are used for sequences that have other
commands.
Send wait time No reason to change.
Send message
Receive message
Response write
enable
Next process
Error process
152
Setup Area Allocations Section 5-2
153
Setup Area Allocations Section 5-2
Port Settings The setting for the port settings determines if the default settings or user set-
tings will be used for port 1 and port 2. Be sure to use the same settings as
the RS-232C port on the host computer connected via the Host Link System.
If the default port settings are specified, then the settings of bits 00 to 04 and
the baud rate in D32001 will be ignored.
The default settings used are as follows: Baud rate: 9,600 bps, start bits:
1 bit, data length: 7 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 2 bits.
154
Setup Area Allocations Section 5-2
If user port settings are specified, set bits 00 to 04 and set the baud rate in
D32001.
Setting Example:
0600 Hex = Protocol macro mode with default port settings and baud rate.
Serial Communications Set the serial communications mode to 6 Hex to use protocol macros.
Mode
Start Bits, Data Length, If user settings are specified for the port settings, the number of start bits, data
Stop Bits, Parity, and length, number of stop bits, parity, and baud rate must be set. The start bits
Baud Rate setting, however, will be ignored and 1 start bit will always be used.
Do not set the baud rate setting to between A and F. A setup error will occur if
these settings are used, and the default setting of 9,600 bps will be used. Do
not use settings 1 and 2, which are reserved for the system.
Serial Gateway Response Timeout Monitoring Time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later Only)
The response timeout condition is monitored when a FINS command is con-
verted to the specified protocol and sent.
0: 5 s (default); Setting range: 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s
The response monitoring time is 5 s when set to the default (0), or can be
user-specified in the range 0.1 to 25.5 s by setting between 01 and FF hex.
Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout Monitoring Time (Unit Ver. 1.2 or Later Only)
When converting FINS commands to the specified protocol and sending them
during execution of protocol macros, the timeout condition is monitored from
when the FINS command is received until the command starts to be sent in
the specified protocol.
0: 5 s (default); Setting range: 01 to FF hex (1 to 255 decimal): 0.1 to 25.5 s
The response monitoring time is 5 s when set to the default (0), or can be
user-specified in between 0.1 and 25.5 s by setting the time to between 01 to
FF hex.
Transmission Method Set half-duplex (0) or full-duplex (1) as the transmission mode for the external
device.
Note Half-duplex: Allows data to be sent between two Units in one direction only at
any one time.
A B or A B
Full-duplex: Allows data to be exchanged both ways between two Units at the
same time.
A B
155
Setup Area Allocations Section 5-2
Also, if the external device is connected using 2-wire connections from an RS-
422A/485 port, send and receive data cannot both be on the same transmis-
sion line at the same time. This will create an additional lag time, t2, or 150 µs.
If responses are being received quickly from the external device, i.e., faster
than t1 +t2, create a send delay at the external device or take other measures
to allow for the lag times.
SEND
operation
Data send
processing
t1 t2 = 150 µs
Rapid
response Time lags (see following table)
Data Data cannot be received
reception during this time.
Time Lag t1
Baud rate (bps) Time lag (µs)
1,200 1,116
2,400 578
4,800 288
9,600 144
19,200 73
38,400 36
57,600 24
With full-duplex mode, the reception buffer is cleared immediately before the
sequence is executed. While both the SEND&RECV commands are being
executed, data is input into the reception buffer and is used as the macro
data.
Transmission Time reception Data reception Character trace Timing chart (example)
mode buffer cleared
Half-duplex Immediately before From SEND All during trace Communications
sequence
communications completion to execution
RECV SEND RECV
sequence execution RECV Reception buffer
cleared
and immediately completion, or
Data reception
following SEND following SEND (See note 3.)
completion by the completion to Character trace
SEND or immediately
SEND&RECV before SEND
command execution
Full-duplex Immediately before All during All during trace Communications
(See note 1) communications communications execution sequence
sequence execution sequence Reception buffer
RECV SEND RECV
Character trace
156
Setup Area Allocations Section 5-2
Clearing/Holding the Set to either clear (OFF) or hold (ON) the contents of the reception buffer
Contents of the when the protocol macro starts.
Reception Buffer in OFF: Clear
Full-duplex Mode (Unit When set to clear (OFF), the contents of the reception buffer will be cleared
Ver. 1.2 or Later Only) when the protocol macro is executed.
ON: Hold
When set to hold (ON), the contents of the reception buffer will not be lost if
data acquisition fails after execution of the protocol macro.
This function prevents loss of data during full-duplex communications.
Data Conversion Timing Set to perform I/O refresh upon request or continuously, as follows:
for Link Word OFF: On-request I/O refresh (Immediate refresh mode)
Specifications (Unit Ver. Data exchange is performed during I/O refresh when a refresh request is sent
1.2 or Later Only) to the CPU Unit for each send/receive command that is executed. A time
delay will occur after the send command is executed until the actual message
is sent when this method is used.
ON: Continuous I/O refresh (Cyclic refresh mode)
During protocol macro execution, I/O refreshing is continuously performed
with the CPU Unit, the data in the link word area is refreshed from the CPU
Unit, and the data in the Board/Unit is accessed during SEND/RECEIVE com-
mand execution. When the send command is executed with this method, the
actual message can be sent immediately.
Maximum Number of From 200 bytes up to a maximum of 1,000 bytes can be set in hexadecimal,
Send/Receive Data Bytes i.e., between 00C8 Hex and 03E8 Hex. Any setting below 00C8 Hex, will be
treated as 00C8 Hex; any setting above 03E8 Hex, will be treated as 03E8
Hex.
Note Flow Control and Maximum Number of Send/Receive Data Bytes
There is a 2.5-Kbyte reception buffer for each serial port in a Serial Communi-
cations Board or Unit. When using flow control, initiate flow control after
receiving about 2 Kbytes, and then release control after processing all but
0.5 Kbytes of receive data. Up to 1,000 bytes (500 words) of data can be
stored for each RECV command if 2 Kbytes of receive data is first stored in
the buffer and 1,000 bytes (03E8 Hex) is set as the maximum number of send/
receive data bytes.
157
Setup Area Allocations Section 5-2
Command
SD signal
RS turned OFF
RD signal after 0.1 to 4 ms
RS signal
Full-duplex Mode There is a 2.5-Kbyte reception buffer for each serial port in a CS/CJ-series
Serial Communications Board or Unit. When using flow control, initiate flow
control after receiving about 2 Kbytes, and then release control after process-
ing all but 0.5 Kbytes of receive data. Up to 1,000 bytes (500 words) of data
158
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
can be stored for each RECV command if 2 Kbytes of receive data is first
stored in the buffer and 1,000 bytes (03E8 Hex) is set as the maximum num-
ber of send/receive data bytes. The timing of this operation is shown below.
(Signal names used below are those at the Serial Communications Board.)
PMCR(260) instruction PMCR(260) instruction
SD signal
RS turned ON when
only 0.5 Kbytes in
buffer.
RD signal
RS signal
159
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Note These bits are used both to change the port settings and to restart the port at
the same time. One of these bits can be turned ON to restart a port without
changing the port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area. The
STUP(237) instruction can also be used to just restart a communications port
by executing STUP(237) with the same port settings as the ones already
being used.
Serial Communications Boards (CS Series Only)
Word Bit Contents
A636 03 to 15 Reserved
02 1: Port 2 Settings Change Bit
01 1: Port 1 Settings Change Bit
00 Reserved
Inner Board Error A424 contains error information for the Serial Communications Board.
Information (CS-series Word Bit Contents
Serial Communications
A424 12 to 15 Non-fatal Reserved
Board Only) errors
11 1 Error log EEPROM error; 0: Normal
(Note 1)
10 1: Protocol macro execution error; 0: Normal
This bit will be turned ON when code 3 or 4 is stored
in the error code for bits 00 to 03 of CIO 1909 or CIO
1919 in the CIO Area.
09 1: Protocol data error (SUM error); 0: Normal
08 1: Setup error; 0: Normal
07 1: Routing table error; 0: Normal
06 Reserved
05 1: Cyclic monitoring error; 0: Normal
04 Reserved
03 Fatal Reserved
02 errors Reserved
(Note 2)
01 1: Inner Bus error; 0: Normal
00 1: Inner Board watchdog timer error; 0: Normal
Note 1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag)
(non-fatal error) will be ON.
2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON.
For details on errors, refer to SECTION 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
160
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Note The flags will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating
mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes and
when the Board or Unit is restarted. If an error flag turns ON, remove the
cause of the error and then reset the error indication from the Programming
Console or other Programming Device.
Serial Communications Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for Software
Boards (CS Series Only) Switches and Status Area. Only the words shown in the following table are
used for Protocol Macros.
Inner Board CIO Area
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words Usage
CIO 1900 Software switches
CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status
CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 Port 1 status
CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Port 2 status
CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Reserved for the system
161
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Serial Communications Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 of the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are
Units (CS/CJ Series) allocated according to the unit number setting. Each unit number is allocated
25 words. With the protocol macro mode, the words shown in the following
table are used for the Software Switches and Status Area.
CPU Bus Unit Area
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Unit No. Words
Unit No. 0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
n: Software switches (port 1/Port 2)
Unit No. 1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549 n + 1 to n + 4: Unit status
Unit No. 2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 n + 5 to n + 14: Port 1 status
Unit No. 3 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599 n + 15 to n + 24: Port 2 status
Unit No. 4 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
Unit No. 5 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
Unit No. 6 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
Unit No. 7 CIO 1675 to CIO 1694
Unit No. 8 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
Unit No. 9 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
Unit No. A CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
Unit No. B CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
Unit No. C CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
Unit No. D CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
Unit No. E CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
Unit No. F CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
162
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Software Switches
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CIO 1900 0 0 0 0
CIO n
Port 1 Wait Release Switch
163
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Software Switch The Software Switches function as described in the following table.
Descriptions
Name Bits in CIO 1900 Meaning Timing
or CIO n Initialize ON OFF
Serial Gate- Bits 04 and 12 The Serial Gateway (mode) is prohib- Startup Manipulated Manipulated
way Prohibit ited during protocol macro processing by user by user
Switch when this Switch turns ON.
The Serial Gateway is no longer prohib-
ited when the Switch is turned OFF.
Abort Switch Bits 03 and 11 Protocol processing will be aborted Startup Manipulated Manipulated
when the switch is turned ON. (Pro- (Note 1) by user by system
cessing may be completed if the Switch
is turned ON too late.)
One-shot Bits 02 and 10 The CX-Protocol will start a one-shot Manipulated At end of
Trace Switch trace when the Switch turns ON. The by CX-Proto- one-shot
(Note 2) trace is ended when the Switch is col trace
turned OFF.
The Board or Unit will be cleared when
the trace buffer becomes full.
The CPU Unit will manipulate the One-
shot Trace Switch and Continuous
Trace Switch when trace operations are
performed from the CX-Protocol. Do not
manipulate these switches directly from
a ladder diagram.
Continuous Bits 01 and 09 The CX-Protocol will start a continuous Manipulated Manipulated
Trace Switch trace when the Switch turns ON. The by CX-Proto- by CX-Proto-
(Note 2) trace is ended when the Switch is col col
turned OFF.
Wait Release Bits 00 and 08 Standby status for the WAIT command Manipulated At end of
Switch (Not supported by will be released when the switch is by user WAIT com-
C200HX/HG/HE) turned ON. mand
Note 1. The Software Switches will also be initialized at the following times: When
the operating mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONI-
TOR modes, when STUP(237) is executed, when the Board or Unit is re-
started, or when the communications port is reset.
2. The first switch of the One-shot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace Switch
to turn ON will determine the trace operation. If a Trace Switch turns ON
when a trace operation is already in progress, the switch will not be effec-
tive even when the current trace operation is completed unless the switch
is first turned OFF. If the One-shot Trace Switch and Continuous Trace
Switch turn ON simultaneously, the Continuous Trace Switch will take pri-
ority.
164
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
165
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Note 1. The settings in the Setup Area are reflected here. The default settings will
be used and will be stored here if a setup error occurs.
2. With a Board, the same bit is used as for A42409 (protocol data error) of
the Auxiliary Area.
166
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
167
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Unit:
n + 7 bits 03, 04, 06,
07 (port 1)
n + 17 bits 03, 04, 06,
07 (port 2)
168
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Note The flags will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating
mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes and
when the Board or Unit is restarted. If an error flag turns ON, remove the
cause of the error and then reset the error indication from the Programming
Console or other Programming Device.
Protocol Macro Function
With the protocol macro function, each port is provided with a reception buffer
that will hold 2.5 Kbytes max. The reception buffer can be used to hold a large
quantity of data when it is being received at once, or when the communica-
tions sequence is waiting due to the WAIT command.
If the protocol macro function is used and receive operations are performed
when the reception buffer is full, the receive data will overwrite the 2.5 Kbytes
of previously received data in the buffer. Therefore, always set flow control
when performing these operations.
Overrun Errors, Framing Errors, Parity Errors and Error Flags
If an overrun error, framing error, or parity error is detected when the protocol
macro function is being used, the receive data will be stored in the buffer with
the error status included. The corresponding error flags will turn ON or OFF
according to the following conditions.
169
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
P: Parity error
Protocol Status The information shown in the following table is input from the Board or Unit to
the Protocol Status Words in the CPU Unit.
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Setting contents
Boards Unit
(CS Series Only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO CIO n+9 n + 19 15 Port Protocol Macro Executing Flag
1909 1919 14 Operat- Step Error Processing Flag
ing
13 Status Abort Flag
12 Tracing Flag
11 Sequence End Completion Flag
10 Sequence Abort Completion Flag
09 Sequence Wait Flag
08 Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag (protocol macros)
1: Prohibited; 0: Not prohibited
04 to 07 Reserved
03 to 00 Error codes
CIO CIO n + 10 n + 20 15 to 12 Reserved
1910 1920 11 to 00 Communications Sequence No.
000 to 999 (000 to 3E7 hex)
170
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Note When the repeat counter is used to read words and 0 is read, 0 will be stored
and the step will be skipped.
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
CIO 1909 (port 1) or 0 0 0 0
CIO 1919 (port 2)
n + 9 (port 1) or
n + 19 (port 2) Error code
1: Trace executing
Tracing Flag 0: Other than above
171
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
172
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Unit:
n + 10 bits 00 to 11
(port 1)
n + 20 bits 00 to 11
(port 2)
173
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Unit:
n + 11 bits 08 to 11
(port 1)
n + 21 bits 08 to 11
(port 2)
Executed Board: Reception matrix case numbers 0 to 15 (0 to Startup When When
Reception CIO 1910 bits 00 to F hex) are stored for which reception has (see note) matrix is sequence
Case No. 03 (port 1) been completed. The number is cleared received starts
(code) CIO 1920 bits 00 to when the sequence execution starts, when
03 (port 2) the STUP(237) instruction is executed, and
at restarts.
Unit: The Executed Reception Case No. is stored
n + 10 bits 00 to 03 only when the reception matrix is set using
(port 1) the RECV or SEND&RECV command. If a
n + 20 bits 00 to 03 reception matrix is not set, the case number
(port 2) will be set to 0 (cleared) when another com-
mand is executed.
Executed Board: Reception matrix case numbers 0 to 15 for Startup When When
Reception CIO 1912 bits 00 to which reception has been completed corre- (see note) matrix is sequence
Case No. 15 (port 1) spond to individual bits (00 to 15), and are received starts
Flags CIO 1922 bits 00 to turned ON to indicate execution. The num-
15 (port 2) bers are cleared when the sequence execu-
tion starts, when the STUP(237) instruction
Unit: is executed, at restarts, and when the execu-
n + 12 bits 00 to 15 tion of each step starts.
(port 1) The reception matrix case number can be
n + 22 bits 00 to 15 checked from the ladder program when the
(port 2) WAIT command is executed or when the
sequence is ended after the reception matrix
RECV command is executed.
The Executed Reception Case No. Flag in
the bit corresponding to the stored case
number will be turned ON only when the
reception matrix is set for the RECV or
SEND&RECV command. If a reception
matrix is not set, the case number will be set
to 0 (cleared) when another command is
executed.
Executed Board: Case numbers 0 to 15 for the steps for which Startup When step When
Step No. CIO 1913 bits 00 to execution has been completed correspond to (see note) is exe- sequence
Flags 15 (port 1) individual bits (00 to 15), and are turned ON cuted starts
CIO 1923 bits 00 to in ascending order. Once a bit has been exe-
15 (port 2) cuted, the bit corresponding to the executed
step is turned ON in ascending order to hold
Unit: the bit ON during the sequence (and after
n + 13 bits 00 to 15 completion).
(port 1)
n + 23 bits 00 to 15
(port 2)
174
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 5-3
Unit:
n + 14 bits 08 to 15
(port 1)
n + 24 bits 08 to 15
(port 2)
Repeat Board: The repeat counter variable N is set. The Startup When When
Counter CIO 1914 bits 00 to value is cleared when the sequence execu- (see note) repeat sequence
Present 07 (port 1) tion starts, when the STUP(237) instruction counter is starts
Value CIO 1924 bits 00 to is executed, and at restarts. refreshed
07 (port 2) The present value N varies according to the
method used to initialize the value. For
Unit: resets, the variable N is set to 0 when the
n + 14 bits 00 to 07 step is started, and the step is executed
(port 1) according to the set number of times. For
n + 24 bits 00 to 07 holds, the variable N for the present value is
(port 2) held when the step is started, and the step is
executed according to the set number of
times.
If the Repeat Counter Setting Value is set to
read word R (see note), and 0 is read, then 0
will be stored and this step will be skipped
(the next process setting will be ignored),
and the sequence will move to the next step
(+ 1). For details, refer to the CX-Protocol
Operation Manual (W344).
Note The flags will also be initialized at the following times: When the operating
mode is changed between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR modes and
when the Board or Unit is restarted. If an error flag turns ON, remove the
cause of the error and then reset the error indication from the Programming
Console or other Programming Device.
Error Codes
The contents of the error codes are shown in the following table.
Code Error contents Protocol macro
execution
0 No error Executed
2 Sequence No. Error Not executed
The sequence number specified by the
PMCR(260) instruction does not exist in the Board
or Unit.
3 Data Read/Write Area Exceeded Error Execution stops after
When data is written or read to the CPU Unit, the the error occurs.
specified area range was exceeded.
4 Protocol Data Syntax Error
A code that cannot be executed occurs while the
protocol macro was executed. (Example: A header
occurs after a terminator.)
175
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Control Data 2 (C2) C2 specifies the communications sequence number in hexadecimal (000 to
999).
Setting range: 0000 to 03E7 Hex
First Send Data Word (S) S specifies the first word of the area in which the data required for sending is
stored.
Word 15 12 11 08 07 00
S 0 0 Number of send words Total number of words including S
S+1
Send data
S+n
176
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
The number of send words in S+1 and the following words is stored in the
rightmost 8 bits of S. The setting range is 01 to FA Hex (250 words or less). S
is also included in the number of words. The data to be sent is stored in S+1
and the following words.
Note When there is no send data, set S to #0000.
First Receive Data Storage R specifies the first word of the area used to initialize the reception buffer or
Word (R) the first word of the area used to store the receive data.
15 12 11 08 07 00
Word
R 0 0 Number of receive words Number of words including R
R+1
Receive data
R+n
Note 1. The function of the receive data storage words (start from R for the number
of words specified in R) differs before and after execution of PMCR(260).
a) Before Execution of PMCR(260)
The contents of the receive data storage words is used as initialization
data for the reception buffer before the communications sequence is
executed.
b) After Execution of PMCR(260)
Data received for the RECV command is stored in the receive data
storage words if there is response data to be written.
2. When there is no receive data, set R to #0000.
177
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Flags
Name Label ON OFF
Error Flag ER • The Communications Port Enabled All other cases
Flag for the specified communica-
tions port (internal logical port) was
OFF when the instruction was exe-
cuted.
• The specified serial port (physical
port) is not set to protocol macro
mode.
• The data setting in C1 is not within
the allowed range.
• The number of words specified in S
or D exceeds 249 (when a word
address was specified for S or D).
Access Error Flag AER A read/write-protected area was All other cases
specified for send data or receive
data.
A write-protected area was specified
for receive data.
Note The EM Area cannot be specified for the receive data when the interrupt noti-
fication function is being used for a Serial Communications Board. If the EM
Area is specified, a protocol macro syntax error will occur and A42410 will
turn ON.
178
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Communications Port These flags turn ON when execution of the PMCR(260) instruction is enabled.
Enabled Flags Depending on the PMCR(260) instruction, they turn OFF at execution, and
turn ON when the port enters an enabled status.
Word Bit Contents
A202 08 to 15 Reserved
07 Communications Port No. 7 Enabled Flag
06 Communications Port No. 6 Enabled Flag
05 Communications Port No. 5 Enabled Flag
04 Communications Port No. 4 Enabled Flag
03 Communications Port No. 3 Enabled Flag
02 Communications Port No. 2 Enabled Flag
01 Communications Port No. 1 Enabled Flag
00 Communications Port No. 0 Enabled Flag
Communications Port The response codes (FINS completion codes) are set when the PMCR(260)
Completion Codes instruction is executed. The contents of these words are also cleared when
the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF at the start of operations or
when the PMCR(260) instruction is executed.
Word Contents
A203 Communications Port No. 0 Completion Code
A204 Communications Port No. 1 Completion Code
A205 Communications Port No. 2 Completion Code
A206 Communications Port No. 3 Completion Code
A207 Communications Port No. 4 Completion Code
A208 Communications Port No. 5 Completion Code
A209 Communications Port No. 6 Completion Code
A210 Communications Port No. 7 Completion Code
A211 to A218 Reserved
179
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Flag Transitions
Communications Port
Enabled Flag
Instruction 1 Instruction 2 Instruction 3
Network communications being being being
instructions executed executed executed
(PMCR(260)/SEND(090)/
RECV(098)/CMND(490))
Communications Port
Error Flag
Communications Port
Completion Code
(Normal end) (No unit correspond- (Normal end)
ing to unit address)
End of previous
processing
Programming Example
Communications Protocol Macro
Input condition Port Enabled Flags Executing Flag
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
Note When executing the PMCR(260) instruction, be sure to check that the serial
communications mode for the port used for communications is set to protocol
macro. If the PMCR(260) instruction is executed with the serial communica-
tions mode set to Host Link (SYSWAY), messages that cannot be used for the
application will be output from the serial port. The serial communications
mode settings can be confirmed in bits 12 to 15 of the following words in the
CIO Area: Serial Communications Board, port 1: 1905, port 2: 1915; Serial
Communications Unit, port 1 = n+5, port 2 = n+15. The setting for protocol
macro is 6 Hex. For details of DM Area allocations, refer to 2-3-1 DM Area.
180
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Connections
Serial Communications
Board
Port 2
Specifies the Temperature Controller Unit No.,
sends the PRESENT VALUE READ command
send data, and receives the present value set
in the response in the specified word.
Send data
Receive data
Temperature Temperature Temperature
Controller E5#K Controller E5#K Controller E5#K
Unit No. 00 Unit No. 01 Unit No. 31
32 Units max.
Send Word Allocation for Sequence No. 000 (Present Value Read)
First word of S Number of send data words Word Contents (data format) Data
send data
S+1 (Undefined) Unit No. S Number of send data words 0002 (fixed)
(4-digit BCD)
Receive Word Allocation for Sequence No. 000 (Present Value Read)
Receive data R Number of receive data words Word Contents (data format) Data
storage words
R+1 Present value R Number of receive data words 0002
(4-digit BCD)
181
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Operand Settings for the Reading the present value of E5@K Unit No. 03 and storing it in DM00201
PMCR(260) Instruction
C1: Control data
182
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Ladder Programming The following diagram shows an example in which sequence number 000
Example (PRESENT VALUE READ) of a Temperature Controller (E5@K Read System)
is executed using the PMCR(260) instruction. If the sequence has been com-
pleted normally, the present value that has been read is transferred to another
word.
Communications Port Protocol Macro
No. 0 Enabled Flag Executing Flag
Input condition
000000 A20200 191915
PMCR If input condition CIO 000000 is ON, Communications
#02E1
Port No. 0 Enabled Flag A20200 is ON, and Protocol
Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 is OFF, then se-
#0000 quence No. 000 is executed for Serial Communications
Board port 2 and the present value is stored in
D00100
DM00201.
Protocol Macro D00200
Executing Flag
191915
DIFD (14) 000100 If Protocol Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 turns OFF,
CIO 000100 turns ON (and remains ON for one cycle).
Protocol Macro Step Error
Executing Flag Processing Flag
000100 191915 191914
MOV (21) If Protocol Macro Executing Flag CIO 191915 is OFF
D00201 and Step Error Processing Flag CIO 191914 is OFF
when CIO 000100 turns ON, then the received present
Step Error D00300 value in DM00201 is moved to DM00300.
Processing Flag
191914
FAL (06) 01 If CIO 000100 is ON (sequence end) and Step Error
Processing Flag CIO 191914 is ON, the sequence ends
Communications
abnormally and a FAL(06) instruction (Non-Fatal Diag-
Port No. 0 Error Flag nostic Instruction) is executed.
A21900
FAL (06) 02 If the Communications Port Error Flag for port 0 turns
ON, a FAL(06) instruction (Non-Fatal Diagnostic Instruc-
tion) is executed.
Protocol Macro
Executing Flag
CIO 191915
00100
One cycle
183
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
R R
m words
Not holding the receive area.
Communications
sequence
RECV
Reception
buffer Clear Failed
Stores cleared
Receive area values
R + 1 onwards
1,2,3... 1. When the PMCR(260) instruction is executed, 250 words of the reception
buffer in the Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit
are cleared.
2. Before executing the communications sequence, the contents of one less
than the number of words specified in R starting from word R + 1 are used
to overwrite the contents of the reception buffer (excluding the first word).
This becomes the initial value of the reception buffer, and the results of the
RECV command execution are waited for. If the contents of the reception
buffer exceeds the contents of the number of words specified in R (or the
184
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
whole area if the number of words is specified as 00), then the initial value
will be set to 0000 Hex.
3. The data that has been received as the result of executing the RECV com-
mand will be stored in the reception buffer (except for the first word) from
the specified first word (offset) and will be verified against the expected re-
ceive messages. If writing the response data is not specified, the receive
data will be saved in the reception buffer and will not be stored in the CPU
Unit.
4. If writing the response data is specified, the data in the reception buffer up
to the most recent data (except for the first word), will be stored in from
words R+1 onwards. The data stored for the number of words (including R)
up to the last word will be saved. Whenever the number of data words
stored exceeds the maximum, the number of words in R will be updated.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the protocol macro operation is complet-
ed.
No. of words Changed
I/O memory specified here I/O memory
No. of words is stored
and updated.
Set
185
Using Protocol Macros Section 5-4
Example 1 Example 2
Sequence Sequence
Step No. 00 Step No. 00
Error Error
Sequence ended
abnormally
Sequence ended
abnormally
Error Error
Sequence ended
abnormally
When the sequence ends normally When the sequence ends normally
Error processing
for step No. 00
Step Error Step Error
Processing Processing
Flag Flag
When the sequence ends abnormally When the sequence ends abnormally
Note The Step Error Processing Flag is used to see whether error processing has been executed for
an individual step in a sequence, and not for the overall steps. Therefore, as shown in Example 2
above, after executing error processing during a sequence (step No. 00), the flag will remain ON,
even if the next step ends normally. Care is therefore required because it is not always possible
to use this flag to determine whether the overall sequence has ended abnormally.
186
Simple Backup Function (Backup of Protocol Macro Data) Section 5-5
All data
Note The following table shows the combinations of CPU Units and Serial Commu-
nications Board/Unit that support the Simple Backup Function.
187
Simple Backup Function (Backup of Protocol Macro Data) Section 5-5
Precautions for Using the When using the Simple Backup Function in CS1H/G-CPU@@H products of
Simple Backup Function Lot No. 011101 or earlier* combined with the Serial Communications Board
(CS1W-SCB@@-V1), proper backup will not be possible if the backup file
(BACKUPE1.PRM) remains in the Memory Card.
*Reading lot numbers
In order to use the Simple Backup Function in this combination, delete the
backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM) inside the Memory Card, then execute the backup.
If backup is executed without deleting this backup file, the RDY LED and the
CPU Unit’s ERR/ARM LED will both flash, and the Protocol Data Error Flag (bit
A42409) will turn ON with the restore operation. The Serial Communications Board
will also automatically delete the backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM).
Applications Use the Simple Backup Function when replacing all Units or creating backup
files of all of the PLC’s data, including the data in the CPU Unit and Serial
Communications Boards or Units.
Operation Use the following procedures to create a Protocol Data File on the Memory
Card, restore the Protocol Data File, and compare the protocol data with the
Memory Card’s Protocol Data File.
2. Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds.
188
Simple Backup Function (Backup of Protocol Macro Data) Section 5-5
All data
This procedure creates the Protocol Data File and writes it to the Memory
Card along with the other backup files.
When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indica-
tor on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the
data is being written. The Indicator will go OFF after the data has been written
properly.
189
Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-6
If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash. The CPU
Unit’s ERR/ALM Indicator will flash and bit A42409 (the Protocol Data Error
Flag) will be turned ON.
Serial Communications Unit Operation
The Serial Communications Unit’s RDY Indicator will flash during the restore
operation. Both the RDY Indicator and RUN Indicator will be lit when the
restore operation is completed normally.
If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash and the
ERC Indicator will be lit.
■ Comparing the Protocol Data with the Memory Card’s Protocol Data File
Follow these steps to compare the Serial Communications Board/Unit’s proto-
col data with the Protocol Data File in the Memory Card:
1. Make the following settings to pins 7 and 8 in the DIP Switch on the front
of the CPU Unit.
Pin Setting
7 OFF
8 OFF
2. Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds.
Memory Card power supply switch
Serial Communications
Board/Unit CPU Unit
All data
190
Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-6
Step 1 (send)
to send command
(4) Send
R (O1, 2)
O1
OUT
Send data Send data
Therefore, when a send command is executed ((1) in the above diagram), the
read processing of data using variables from the I/O memory addresses in the
CPU Unit specified in the link words is performed at the start of I/O refreshing
(2). The send message is compiled based on this data (3), after which the
actual message is sent (4). As a result, the actual message send timing is not
when the send command is executed, but waits until the next I/O refresh with
the CPU Unit.
191
Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-6
instruction
Execution
Step 1 (send) Send message according
to send command (3) Send
R (O1, 2)
Link word 1
Read, compile message
I/O memory I1
(2)
Receive data IN Receive data
O1
OUT
Send data Send data
Note When “continuous I/O refreshing” is specified for the link word specification
data exchange timing, the normal I/O refresh will be executed with the CPU
Unit while protocol macros are being executed without syncing with execution
of the send and receive commands. You must therefore be careful of the data
exchange timing at the start and end of protocol macros.
1. The new data may not be sent by the send command in a protocol macro
that is executed immediately after the send data in memory in the CPU Unit
is updated. The send data must be read to the SCU/SCB in the I/O refresh
period before it will be sent by the send command.
2. Data received by a receive command in a protocol macro may not be re-
freshed in the CPU Unit if execution of the protocol macro is completed im-
mediately after the receive command. If the protocol macro is still being
executed during the I/O refresh period after the data is received by the re-
ceive command, the receive data will be refreshed in memory in the CPU
Unit.
The “continuous I/O refreshing” setting is suitable for applications in which
send/receive commands are executed repeatedly in the same protocol macro
(i.e., the same PMCR). If data in the CPU Unit is to be sent with a send com-
mand in the next protocol macro or receive data for a receive command is to
be refreshed in the CPU Unit and then the protocol macro ended, use the “on-
request I/O refreshing” setting.
192
Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-6
193
Enhanced Protocol Macro Functions Section 5-6
194
SECTION 6
Serial Gateway
This section provides an overview of the Serial Gateway, information on I/O memory allocations, and procedures for using
the functions. Information on protocol conversion, routing table requirements, and communications frames is also
provided. The Serial Gateway can be used only for Unit Ver. 1.2 or later.
195
Serial Gateway Overview Section 6-1
6-1-3 Features
Unifying to FINS Networks for CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON Components
■ Pre-Ver. 1.2 Units
To access an OMRON CompoWay/F-compatible component (e.g., Tempera-
ture Controller or Digital Panel Meter) by sending user-specified CompoWay/F
commands from the PLC, the standard system protocol, CompoWay/F Mas-
ter, must be executed. This operation is performed by executing the
PMCR(260) instruction in the ladder program of the CPU Unit on the same
PLC using the Board/Unit’s protocol macro function.
This protocol macro function, however, does not enable access through the
network. (When execution of a user-specified CompoWay/F command is not
required, a CJ1W-CIF21 Simple Communications Unit can be used to share
specified data without using communications instructions.)
196
Serial Gateway Overview Section 6-1
Network
CMND(490) instructions
Serial
Network
Serial Communications Unit/Board
with unit version 1.2 or later
Protocol
conversion
FINS
Network
CompoWay/F
197
Serial Gateway Overview Section 6-1
Network
CMND(490) instructions
Serial
Network
Serial Communications Unit/Board
with unit version 1.2 or later
Protocol
conversion
FINS
Network
Modbus command
198
Serial Gateway Overview Section 6-1
Network
CMND(490) instructions
Serial
Protocol
conversion
FINS
Network Serial
Host Link FINS
Access to PLCs used as Host
Link Slaves from personal
computers, PTs, PLCs, and
other devices by using user-
specified FINS commands is
possible.
CS/CJ-series or CVM1/CV-series PLCs
PMCR(260)
instruction
Serial
WM30-S-V2 Wireless Modem
RS-232C Host Link master protocol
macro executing PLC
199
Serial Gateway Overview Section 6-1
Note If the Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch allocated in the CIO Area is OFF, the
Serial Gateway is enabled whether protocol macros are being executed or
not. During execution of protocol macros, however, the Serial Gateway is pro-
cessed using interrupts between steps in the communications sequence.
200
DM Area Allocations (Using Serial Gateway Mode) Section 6-2
Item Details
Send start timeout The time is monitored after a FINS command is received and
monitoring converted into another protocol until transmission starts (pro-
tocol macro mode only).
Default: 5 s; Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s
Note If a timeout occurs, the FINS end code is returned to the
source of the FINS command (0204 hex: Remote node
busy). Send processing is not executed and the
received FINS command is discarded.
Send delay The time after protocol conversion using the Serial Gateway
until actual data is sent can be set (Serial Gateway mode or
protocol macro mode only).
Default: 0 s; Setting range: 0 to 300 s
Note The following operations will result if the Serial Gateway is executed either
using a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit or using a Ver. 1.2 or later Unit/Board without
Serial Gateway or protocol macro mode set for serial communications at the
serial port.
• If either NT Link or loopback test mode is used for serial communications,
or if protocol macro mode is used with a pre-Ver. 1.2 Board/Unit, an unde-
fined command response will be returned (end code: 0401 hex).
• If Host Link mode is used for serial communications, the message will be
converted into a FINS command using Host Link slave-initiated communi-
cations and transferred (this will mainly result in a response timeout being
returned, depending on the remote device (end code: 0205 hex))
201
DM Area Allocations (Using Serial Gateway Mode) Section 6-2
Setup Area
■ Allocations
m = D30000 + 100 × unit number
DM Area Bit Setting
Board (CS Series Unit (CS/CJ
only) Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
D32000 D32010 m m+10 15 Port settings: 0 (default) or 1 (user-specified)
12 to 14 Reserved
08 to 11 Serial communications mode
(9 hex: Serial Gateway mode)
05 to 07 Reserved
04 Start bits
0: 1 bit; 1: 1 bit (Always 1 bit regardless of which bit is set)
03 Data length
0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
02 Stop bits
0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
01 Parity
0: Yes
1: No
00 Parity
0: Even
1: Odd
202
DM Area Allocations (Using Serial Gateway Mode) Section 6-2
■ Details
Port Settings
Set whether to make the user-specified settings for port 1 or port 1. These
settings are the same as for the RS-232C port of general-purpose external
devices connected using a protocol macro.
0: Default; 1: User-specified setting
When the default (0) is set, the following details are set for the port and bits 00
to 04 do not need to be set separately.
Baud rate: 9,600 bps; Start bits: 1 bit; Data length: 7 bits; Parity: Even; Stop
bits: 2 bits
When user-specified settings (1) are specified, set bits 00 to 04 and the baud
rate (in the following word).
Setting example: 0900 hex: Serial Gateway mode, using default settings for
port setting and baud rate.
203
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area in Serial Gateway Mode Section 6-3
CTS Control
When CTS control is enabled, transmission starts when the request to send
signal (RS) turns ON after checking that the send enabled signal (CS) is ON.
When CTS control is disabled, transmission starts when the request to send
signal (RS) turns ON, without checking whether the send enabled signal (CS)
is ON.
Auxiliary Area
Port 1 and Port 2 Port Settings Change Bits
These bits can be turned ON from the program using the OUT or other
instructions to change communications settings and restart the serial ports.
When changing the communications settings and restarting the communica-
tions port have been completed, the bit will be automatically turned OFF.
Note These bits are used both to change the communications port settings and to
restart the communications port. Therefore, one of these bits can be turned
ON using an OUT instruction to restart a communications port without chang-
ing the settings in the DM Area. The STUP(237) instruction can also be used
to simply restart a communications port by executing the STUP(237) instruc-
tion with the same port settings as those already being used.
204
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area in Serial Gateway Mode Section 6-3
Note (1) If any of bits 05 to 11 turn ON (1), A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag) (non-
fatal error) will turn ON (1).
(2) If either bit 00 or 01 turns ON (1), A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag)
will turn ON (1).
For details on errors, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
CIO Area
Words in the CIO Area are allocated as Software Switches, which are manip-
ulated from the CPU Unit to control the operation of the Serial Communica-
tions Board or Unit, and for a Status Area, which contains status and error
information for the Serial Communications Board or Unit.
205
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area in Serial Gateway Mode Section 6-3
Status Area
The Status Area is used to read the Serial Communications Board’s or Unit’s
setting status, communications status, transmission control signal status, and
transmission error status.
Allocations
Direction: Board/Unit to CPU Unit (input)
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Board Unit
(CS Series (CS/CJ Series)
only)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
1901 n+1 02 to 15 Reserved
01 1: Error log EEPROM error 0: Error log EEPROM normal
00 1: Protocol data error (SUM value error) 0: Protocol data normal
1902 n+2 00 to 15 Reserved
1903 n+3 00 to 15 Reserved
1904 n+4 00 to 15 Reserved
206
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area in Serial Gateway Mode Section 6-3
Note The port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area are stored. If the
Board/Unit is operating on default settings due to a System Setup error the
default settings will be stored.
207
Using the Serial Gateway Section 6-4
208
Using the Serial Gateway Section 6-4
• CIO Area
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Word Bit Function
Board Unit
1900 n 12 Port 2 Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch (protocol
macros)
0: Not prohibited; 1: Prohibited
04 Port 1 Serial Gateway Prohibit Switch (protocol
macros)
0: Not prohibited; 1: Prohibited
Use the following flag to check whether the Serial Gateway is currently prohib-
ited or not.
Word Bit Contents
Board Unit
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
1909 1919 n+9 n+19 08 Serial Gateway Prohibited
Flag
1: Prohibited; 0: Not prohibited
209
Using the Serial Gateway Section 6-4
Use the following flag to check whether a Serial Gateway response timeout or
send start timeout has occurred.
Word Bit Contents
Board Unit
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
1908 1918 n+8 n+18 05 Serial Gateway response tim-
eout, Serial Gateway send
start timeout, or other timeout
(protocol macro Tfs, Tfr, or Tr)
1: Timeout; 0: Normal
Step 2: Set the Local Network Tables in the Routing Tables (Using CX-Net).
This step is necessary only when routing table settings are required.
1,2,3... 1. Using CX-Net, select Setup from the Routing Table Menu. Select either
the option FINS Local or FINS Network using the option button to display
the Routing Table Window.
2. Click the Table View Tab, and create the local network table at the left of
the table.
3. Set the unit address (see note 1) of the serial port to be treated as a net-
work in the SIOU column as a decimal value. Set the network address to
be allocated to the serial port in the Local Network column on the right.
Local Network Table
Example: The following diagram shows the local network table for used to
allocated network address 3 to serial port 1 of a Serial Communications Unit
with unit number 1.
Enter the serial port number as a decimal To treat the serial port indicated on the
in the SIOU column. left as a network, enter the network
Example: For serial port 1 of the Serial address to be assigned in the Local
Communications Unit with unit number 1, Network column.
80 hex + 04 hex x 1 = 84 hex = 132 Example: To assign network address 3,
decimal. enter the decimal value 3 in the Local
Network column.
210
Using the Serial Gateway Section 6-4
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Serial port Serial port number
Peripheral port Peripheral port FD hex (253 decimal)
RS-232C port RS-232C port FC hex (252 decimal)
Note The following ladder program example shows how to return the Serial Gate-
way to the not prohibited status when the PMCR(260) instruction has been
executed and the sequence is completed. (This example uses port number 1
of a Serial Communications Unit with unit number 0.)
W000.00
SET When execution condition W00000 is ON, the Serial Gateway Prohibited Flag
1500.04 (port 1: Word n, bit 04: CIO 1500, bit 04) turns ON and the Serial Gateway is
Execution condition
prohibited.
ASL At the same time, bit 00 of W000 is shifted one bit to the left.
W000
ASL At the same time, bit 00 of W000 is shifted one bit to the left.
W000
W000.02 150915
RSET When W00002 is ON, the sequence ends, and the Protocol Macro Executing
Protocol Macro 1500.04 Flag (port 1: Word n+9, bit 15: CIO 150915) turns from ON to OFF, the Serial
Executing Flag Gateway Prohibited Flag (port 1: Word n, bit 04: CIO 150004) is reset to 0,
(n+9, bit 15) and the Serial Gateway is no longer prohibited.
211
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Note For details on FINS response end codes, refer to Troubleshooting Using FINS
End Codes in 11-3-2 Serial Gateway (Serial Gateway or Protocol Macro
Mode).
212
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
CompoWay/F
command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
CompoWay/F-compatible
OMRON component
213
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F
command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
CompoWay/F-compatible
OMRON component
214
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Executing Smart Active Parts Using an NS-series PT (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to CompoWay/F protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from PT on Ethernet or serial NT Link Details Routing tables
to treat serial
communication
s path as
network
NS-series PT Access via serial communications using Optional
CompoWay/F is possible from a PT con-
Smart Active Part
nected to the network by executing a
FINS message (sent internally)
Smart Active Part that is connected seri-
FINS header 2803
CompoWay/F ally, which automatically sends an internal
command
Ethernet FINS command.
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F
command
RS-485 (CompoWay/F)
CompoWay/F-compatible
OMRON component
215
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
(2) The contents of the CompoWay/F command enclosed in the FINS mes-
sage that is sent is as follows:
Node number + subaddress + SID + command text (ASCII must be used.)
STX, ETX+BCC are not required when sending FINS. They are added
automatically for serial communications.
Shell
D-Sub 9-pin (Cable connector type: Male)
Note Be sure to connect terminating resistance of between 100 and 125 Ω (1/2 W)
to the terminals of the remote devices at either end of the RS-422A/485 trans-
mission path. (Set the terminating resistance on the Board/Unit by turning
ON/OFF the Terminating Resistance Switch.)
216
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Shell
Signal
name
RS-422A/485
interface
Note Be sure to connect terminating resistance of between 100 and 125 Ω (1/2 W)
to the terminals of the remote devices at either end of the RS-422A/485 trans-
mission path. (Set the terminating resistance on the Board/Unit by turning
ON/OFF the Terminating Resistance Switch.)
217
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Modbus-RTU
command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
Modbus-RTU
Slave device
(e.g, OMRON
Inverter)
Protocol
conversion
Modbus-RTU
command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
Modbus-RTU
Slave device
(e.g, OMRON
Inverter)
218
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Executing Smart Active Parts Using an NS-series PT (Sending Internal FINS Messages)
The Board/Unit converts the FINS messages to Modbus-RTU protocol for
sending in this operation.
Access from PT on Ethernet or serial NT Link Details Routing tables
to treat serial
communications
path as network
NS-series PT Access via serial communications using Optional
Modbus-RTU is possible from a PT con-
Smart Active Parts
nected to the network by executing a
FINS message (sent internally)
Smart Active Part that is connected seri-
Modbus-RTU
ally, which automatically sends an internal
FINS header 2804
Ethernet
command
FINS command.
CPU Unit
Protocol
conversion
Modbus-RTU
command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
ORMON Inverter
219
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Modbus-ASCII command
RS-485 (Modbus-ASCII)
Modbus-ASCII
Slave device
Protocol
conversion
Modbus-ASCII
command
RS-485 (Modbus-ASCII)
Modbus-ASCII
Slave device
220
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
FINS command
221
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
1,2,3... 1. Register the PLC to be connected serially (using Host Link FINS) in the
project gateway (e.g., PLC2).
2. In the Change PLC Dialog Box of the target PLC (e.g., PLC1), select the
relay PLC (gateway PLC) in the Network Type pull-down menu (e.g.,
[PLC2] (See note.)) and click the Settings Button to the right of the Net-
work Type pull-down menu.
Note The PLC name enclosed in square brackets (e.g., [PLC2]) indicates
the gateway PLC.
3. The Network Settings Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the Guide for Se-
rial Gateway Button.
4. The Serial Gateway Guide Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the unit and the port number under the Calculate Address Area, the
serial port number address is automatically calculated in the Calculated
Address Field.
Select the Use SYSWAY with the port option, and enter the actual Host
Link unit number for the target (communications partner) PLC in the Host
Link Unit Number field (see note).
Finally, click the Apply Button.
222
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
The Serial
Communications port
address is automatically
calculated.
Select the Unit.
Note When using the CX-Programmer, enter the actual Host Link unit number. Do
not add 1 to the value. The CX-Programmer will automatically add 1 internally.
Access from CX-Programmer Connected to Network
Network-to-Serial Details Routing tables to
treat serial
communications
path as network
Personal computers (e.g., CX-Pro- Required
grammer) connected through the
CX-Programmer, etc.
network to the PLC master can
access a PLC slave that is con-
FINS message nected serially to the PLC master
User-specified Network (Ethernet, Controller via Host Link.
FINS command LInk, DeviceNet)
Protocol
conversion
Used as Host
Link Master
223
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Protocol
conversion
CS/CJ-series
Used as Host or CVM1/CV-
Link Master series PLC
(Host Link
Slave)
User-specified
FINS command Network (Ethernet,
Controller LInk,
DeviceNet)
User-specified
Host Link header
FINS command Terminator RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
Used as Host
Link Master
224
Protocol Conversion Section 6-5
Protocol
conversion
User-specified
Host Link header FINS command Terminator RS-422A/485
(Host Link)
Used as Host
Link Master
Protocol
conversion
User-specified RS-422A/485
Host Link header FINS command Terminator
(Host Link)
CS/CJ-series or
Used as Host CVM1/CV-series PLC
Link Master (Host Link Slave)
225
Serial Gateway Section 6-6
Note (1) The reception buffer is cleared during transfer processing using the Serial
Gateway. Therefore, when the FINS command is received, and the com-
mand in the following step is the RECEIVE command, the RECEIVE
command takes priority over the Serial Gateway.
(2) The Serial Gateway is executed using interrupts between steps. The in-
terrupts are not executed within a step. (Therefore, the Serial Gateway is
never executed after the SEND command in a SEND&RECV command.)
226
Serial Gateway Section 6-6
RECEIVE command
RECEIVE command takes priority, Serial Gateway takes priority and
and the next step is executed. conversion, transmission, and re-
sponse reception processing is exe-
cuted on an interrupt between steps.
227
Serial Gateway Section 6-6
Step n
SEND&RECV
FINS command
Reception
Step n+1
(The next step is a RE-
CEIVE command, so the RECEIVE
RECEIVE command is
executed and the Serial
Gateway waits.)
Sequence temporarily suspended
(The next step is a SEND CompoWay/F or
command (not RECEIVE) so the other command
Serial Gateway is executed.) CompoWay/F or
other response
SEND
Note If a multiple-frame command (see note) protocol macro is sent during protocol
macro execution, set the Serial Gateway mode status to prohibited (in the CIO
Area). Otherwise, a FINS message converted using Serial Gateway will inter-
rupt between steps of the executing protocol macro, and may occur in
between frames of the multiple-frame command.
Note A multiple-frame command is a command in which the protocol mac-
ro command text is divided into multiple frames that are sent in se-
quence.
Note If a Serial Gateway response timeout occurs, CIO word n+8/n+18, bit 05
(Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout or Serial Gateway Response Timeout)
228
Serial Gateway Section 6-6
will turn ON (1). Therefore, if the end code 0205 hex is returned to the source
of the FINS command and CIO word n+8/n+18, bit 05 is ON, a Serial Gateway
response timeout has occurred.
(1) If a Serial Gateway send start timeout occurs, CIO word n+8/n+18, bit 05
(Serial Gateway Send Start Timeout or Serial Gateway Response Time-
out) will turn ON (1).
(2) When the Serial Gateway is executed during protocol macro execution,
the communications sequence contents and the FINS command recep-
tion timing may suspend step transition of the communications sequence
(when the next step does not contain the RECEIVE command, the Serial
Gateway will be executed by interrupting the sequence before the next
step, and the step transition will be suspended).
Use the Serial Gateway send start timeout function to monitor at the
source of the FINS command whether step transition in the communica-
tions sequence has been suspended due to execution of the Serial Gate-
way. If the converted command does not start to be sent within the set
time, either retry executing the FINS command or change the communi-
cations sequence.
229
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
Time
FINS transmission source:
FINS command Send delay
Conversion
Board/Unit:
230
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
231
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
FINS network
FINS Commu-
Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network
nications Unit
CPU Unit
Unit number Network
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from unit number: 0, port 1
A
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS) (1) Network address:
To serial communications path network address A
Target: PLC
CPU Unit (2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
Target: PLC
(2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
232
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
CPU Unit
Unit number Network
address
80 hex (128 decimal)
Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1 A
Serial communications
path (Host Link FINS) (1) Network address:
To serial communications path network address A
CPU Unit
Target: PLC
(2) Node address: Unit numbers for Host Link (0 to 31) + 1
(3) Unit address: E.g., 00 hex for CPU Unit
PLC
nications Unit
CPU Unit
Unit address:
To serial port unit Serial communications path
address (e.g., 80 hex) (CompoWay/F, Modbus)
Target: OMRON Component or Modbus Slave
233
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
FINS network
Serial Communications Unit/Board
E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
Node address: PLC Routing tables for treating serial communications path as a network
CPU Unit
Local PLC internal Network
Unit number address
communications
80 hex (128 decimal)
To 00 hex Calculated from Unit No. 0, port 1 A
Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
234
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
Serial-to-Serial-to-Serial Conversion
Routing tables to enable the serial communications path to be treated as a
network are optional.
PLC_1
CPU Unit
No routing tables required to treat serial
(1) Network address: communications path as a network
To PLC_1 serial port unit
address (e.g., 89 hex)
Serial Communications Unit/Board
Serial communications E.g., Unit number 0, port 1
path (Host Link FINS)
(2) Node address: PLC_2 PLC_2
CPU Unit
unit numbers for Host Link No routing tables required to treat serial
(0 to 31) + 1 communications path as a network
PLC_1
CPU Unit
Network
PLC_2 unit numbers for Unit number address
80 hex (128 decimal)
Host Link (0 to 31) + 1 Calculated from unit number 0, port 1 A
6-7-4 Explanation
To treat the serial communications path as a network, the serial port itself is
recognized as a Communications Unit and is allocated a network address.
Serial Communications Unit/Board
Serial port
Commu-
nications Local network table in routing tables
Unit address U Unit Unit number Network
Ex-
(See note.) (See note.) address
pressed U n
as:
235
Conditions Requiring Routing Tables Section 6-7
The CX-Net in the CX-Programmer is used to set the relationship between the
serial port’s unit address and the allocated network address in the local net-
work tables of the routing tables. These settings are then transferred to the
CPU Unit to which the Serial Communications Unit/Board is mounted.
CX-Net in CX-
Programmer Local network table in routing tables
Local
network
table
Routing Local
enabled network
table
236
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Serial port 00 hex Serial 28 03 Node No. Sub- SID Command Text
allocated port unit (× 101) address "0" (MRC, SRC) (ASCII code)
address address (× 102) "00" (ASCII (ASCII code
or local or local (ASCII code (ASCII code code 4 bytes)
network network 2 bytes) 3030 hex) 30 hex)
address node etc.
address
CompoWay/F
237
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
CompoWay/F
STX Node No. Sub- End code Command Response Text ETX BCC
1
(02 hex) (× 102) address (ASCII (MRC, (MRES, (ASCII (03 hex)
(× 10 ) "00" code SRC) SRES) code)
(ASCII (ASCII (ASCII (ASCII
code code 8 bytes) code code
4 bytes) 3030 8 bytes) 8 bytes)
hex) etc.
6-8-2 Modbus-RTU
Command Frame
Frame before Conversion
Note The silent interval in the Modbus-RTU frame is automatically generated by the
Serial Communications Board/Unit.
238
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Modbus-RTU frame
Start (silent Slave FUNCTION Communications data Error End (silent
interval of address code (n bytes) check interval of
3.5 (1 byte) (1 byte) CRC 3.5
characters) characters)
(See note.) (1 byte) (See note.)
6-8-3 Modbus-ASCII
Command Frame
Frame before Conversion
239
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Modbus-ASCII frame
Serial port 00 hex Serial 28 05 User- User- Slave FUNCTION Communications data
allocated port speci- speci- address code (ASCII code n characters)
address unit fied fied (ASCII code (ASCII code or error code
or local or local address 2 characters: 2 characters:
network network 2 bytes) 2 bytes)
address node
address
240
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Response Frame
Frame before Conversion
Host Etc. Text Error
Host Link Link check Terminator
header header code
code
@ Unit No. for FA FINS header FINS End code FINS text FCS *+CR
Host Link command
(0 to 31)
C Operand
C+2 bits 00 to 07 (Send destination network address)
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
Network address corresponding to serial port in the routing tables.
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
• CompoWay/F, Modbus: Depends on the system configuration.
• Host Link FINS: Always set the unit address of the serial port.
C+3 bits 08 to 15 (Remote destination node address)
• CompoWay/F, Modbus
• With routing tables that treat serial communications path as a network:
00 hex (indicates local PLC communications)
• Without routing tables that treat serial communications path as a net-
work: Node address for specifying the actual remote PLC
• Host Link FINS
• Host Link unit number incremented by one (1 to 32)
C+3 bits 00 to 07 (Send destination unit address)
• CompoWay/F, Modbus
Always set the unit address of the serial port
241
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Note Use either of the following methods to specify the serial port using
the CMND(490) instruction.
• Set 80/81 hex + 4 × unit number directly as the serial port unit address
in the send destination unit address bits 00 to 07 of C+3. (With this
method, set the serial port number (physical port) to 0 hex (not used)
in bits 08 to 11 of C+2)
• Set the unit address of the Serial Communications Board/Unit itself
(Board: E1 hex; Unit: 10 hex + unit number) in the send destination unit
address bits 00 to 07 of C+3, and set the serial port numbers (Port
number 1: 1 hex; Port number 2: 2 hex) in the serial port number (phys-
ical port) bits 08 to 11 of C+2.
• Host Link FINS
Always set the unit address of the actual destination unit.
242
Communications Frames Section 6-8
CMND
instruction
FINS message
FINS header 2804 Modbus-RTU command
Network (Ethernet)
FINS message
FINS header 2804 Modbus-RTU command
Network (Controller Link)
Network address: 2
Serial Communications Unit
Unit No. 3, port 1
Conversion Link Unit CPU Unit
Protocol
Node address: 5 conversion
Example: Write data for frequency reference value
(FUNCTION code 10 hex, register No. 0002 hex)
Modbus-RTU command
RS-485 (Modbus-RTU)
Port 1 unit address:
80 hex + 4 hex × unit number 3 = 8C hex 3G3MV OMRON Inverter
List of Settings
• FINS Network Settings
Item Value Setting location
(Example)
Send destination network address 2 Set 02 hex in the control data C+2 bits 00 to 07 (net-
(Controller Link network address of PLC work address) of CMND(490).
to which Serial Communications Unit is Note: Set 0 hex in the control data C+2 bits 08 to 11
mounted) (serial port number) of CMND(490).
Send destination node address 5 Set 05 hex in the control data C+3 bits 08 to 15 (send
(node address in Controller Link for PLC destination node address) of CMND(490).
to which Serial Communications Unit is
mounted)
Serial Communications Unit unit num- 3 Use to calculate the following unit address for the
ber serial port
Serial Communications Unit serial port Port 1 80 hex + 4 hex × unit number 3 = 8C hex
Send destination unit address 80 hex + 4 hex × unit Set 8C hex in the control data C+3 bits 00 to 07 (send
(unit address of serial port on Serial number 3 = 8C hex (or destination unit address) of CMND(490).
Communications Unit) 10 + unit number 3 = 13 (Alternatively, set 13 hex in the control data C+3 bits
hex, and serial port 00 to 07 (send destination unit address) and set 1 hex
number 1 = 1 hex) in C+2 bits 08 to 11 (serial port number).)
• Modbus-RTU Settings
Command Frame
Item Set Setting location
value
FINS command code: Converting 2804 Set 2804 hex in controller data s of the
to Modbus-RTU = 2804 hex hex CMND(490) instruction.
Modbus slave address (e.g., 02 02 Set 0210 hex in controller data s+1 of
hex) hex the CMND(490) instruction.
FUNCTION code: DATA WRITE = 10
10 hex hex
Write data register No. (e.g., fre- 0002 Set 0002 hex in controller data s+2 of
quency reference = 0002 hex) hex CMND(490).
243
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Response Frame
Item Setting Setting location
Modbus Slave address (e.g., 02 hex) 02 hex Stored in D+2 of CMND(490)
FUNCTION code: Write data (= 10 hex) 10 hex
Write data register No. (e.g., frequency reference = 0002 hex) 0002 hex Stored in D+3 of CMND(490)
Write data registers (e.g., 1 register) 0001 hex Stored in D+4 of CMND(490)
[CMND S D C]
Command Details
Operand Offset Value Meaning
S: +0: 2804 hex Conversion to Modbus-RTU (FINS command code: 2804 hex)
D01000 +1: 0210 hex Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 hex, FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE)
+2: 0002 hex Write data register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference)
+3: 0001 hex Number of write data registers: 0001 hex (1 register)
+4: 0200 hex Number of attached data bytes: 02 hex (2 bytes); Leftmost register No.: 00 hex
+5: 6400 hex Rightmost register No.: 64 hex (Frequency reference value: 10.0 Hz when unit is 0.1
Hz), blank = 00 hex
D: First response storage word
D02000
C: +0: 00 0C hex Number of command data bytes: 000C hex (12 bytes decimal)
D00000 +1: 00 0A hex Number of response data bytes: 000A hex (10 bytes decimal)
+2: 0002 hex Send destination network address: 02 hex; Serial port number: 0 hex (direct serial port
unit address specification)
+3: 058C hex Send destination node address: 05 hex; Send destination unit address: 8C hex
+4: 0000 hex Response required; Communications port number: 0; Resends: 0 hex
+5: 0000 hex Response monitoring time: 2 s
Response
Operand Offset Value Meaning
D: +0: 2804 hex Conversion to Modbus-RTU (FINS command code: 2804 hex)
D02000 +1: 0000 hex FINS end code: 0000 hex (normal)
+2: 0210 hex Modbus-RTU slave address: 02 hex, FUNCTION code: 10 hex (DATA WRITE)
+3: 0002 hex Write data register No.: 0002 hex (frequency reference)
+4: 0001 hex Number of write data registers: 0001 hex (1 register)
244
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Network (Ethernet)
FINS message
FINS command
Serial Communications Unit E.g., Operation mode change
Unit No. 6, port 2 (operation stopped): 0402 hex
CPU Unit
Ethernet unit Unit No. Network address
node address: 4 Serial port unit Serial port network
Local
address: 153 address: 5
Protocol network
conversion table
No. 6 = 99 hex
(153 decimal), which
corresponds to network
address 5.
CS/CJ-series or
CVM1/CV-series PLC
(Host Link slave)
Settings
• FINS Network Settings
Item Value (example) Setting location
Send destination network Network address for • Set 05 hex in bits 00 to 07 (net-
address serial communica- work address) of control data
(network address allocated tions path allocated C+2 in the CMND(490) instruc-
to target serial port in routing
in local network tion.
tables) table settings is 5 Note Set 0 hex in bits 08 to 11
(serial port number) of
control data C+2 in the
CMND(490) instruction
Send destination node Remote PLC unit • Set 02 hex in bits 08 to 15
address number for Host (send destination node
(unit number for Host Link of Link: 1 address) of control data C+3 in
PLC connected to target Therefore, set 1+1 the CMND(490) instruction.
serial port + 1) =2
Send destination unit CPU Unit: 00 hex • Set 00 hex in bits 00 to 07 of
address control data C+3 in the
(unit address of remote unit CMND(490) instruction.
on PLC connected to target
serial port)
245
Communications Frames Section 6-8
Response Frame
Item Setting Setting location
FINS command code (E.g., change 0402 hex Stored in D of CMND(490)
operating mode (stop operation)) instruction
FINS command end code (normal end: 0000 hex Stored in D+1 of CMND(490)
0000 hex) instruction
[CMND S D C]
Command Details
Operand Offset Value Meaning
S: +0: 0402 hex Change operating mode (stop operation) (FINS command code: 0402 hex)
D01000 +1: FFFF hex Change operating mode (stop operation): Always FFFF hex
D: First response storage word
D02000
C: +0: 000C hex Command data bytes: 0004 hex (4 bytes decimal)
D00000 +1: 000A hex Response data bytes: 0004 hex (4 bytes decimal)
+2: 0005 hex Send destination network address: 05 hex; Serial port number: 0 hex (not used)
+3: 0200 hex Send destination node address: 02 hex (set the unit number for Host Link + 1); Send
destination unit address: 00 hex
+4: 0000 hex Response required; Communications port number: 0; Resends: 0 hex
+5: 0000 hex Response monitoring time: 2 s
Response
Operand Offset Value Meaning
D: +0: 0402 hex Change operating mode (stop operation) (FINS command code: 0402 hex)
D02000 +1: FFFF hex FINS end code: FFFF hex (normal end)
Note 1. The method used to set the remote destination network address, node ad-
dress, and unit address for sending data to or receiving data from the PLC
246
Communications Frames Section 6-8
connected serially via Host Link to another PLC on the network (to which
the Serial Communications Board/Unit is mounted) using the SEND(090)/
RECV(098) instructions is the same as for the CMND(490) instruction.
2. When creating Host Link FINS command frames using the CMND(490) in-
struction, always set the unit number for Host Link incremented by one (1
to 32) for the remote destination (send destination) node address (word
C+3, bits 08 to 15 of the CMND(490) instruction). Do not set the unit num-
ber of the actual Host Link slave (0 to 31). Using the Host Link unit number
without incrementing by one will access the PLC with the entered Host Link
unit number less one.
For example, specify remote PLC with Host Link unit number 2 by entering
3 for the remote destination node address. If the 2 is entered, the PLC with
Host Link unit number 1 will be accessed.
To access a PLC on a Host Link FINS network using the Serial Gateway
from CX-Programmer, however, enter the actual Host Link unit number,
without incrementing by one. (Select Change PLC, click the Display Seri-
al Gateway Guide Button, and set unit number in the Host Link SYSWAY
Settings field of the Serial Gateway Guide dialog box.
247
Communications Frames Section 6-8
248
SECTION 7
No-protocol Mode
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use the no-protocol mode. This mode is supported
for Unit Ver. 1.2 or later only.
249
Overview Section 7-1
7-1 Overview
7-1-1 Definition
No-protocol mode is a function used to send and receive data using communi-
cations port I/O instructions (TXD(236)/RXD(235) or TXDU(256)/RXDU(255))
without conversion or protocol. Therefore, in no-protocol mode communica-
tions procedures such as retry processing, data format conversion process-
ing, and processing branching according to the receive data are not
performed.
Note No-protocol mode is supported only when using a Serial Communications
Board/Unit with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later in combination with a CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit with Unit Ver. 3.0 or later. Therefore, be sure to use a CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit with Unit Ver. 3.0 or later if the no-protocol mode is required.
The no-protocol mode enables single-directional data exchange with a gen-
eral-purpose external device with an RS-232C port or RS-422A/485 port
using the TXD(236)/RXD(235) or TXDU(256)/RXDU(255) instructions. For
example, data can be sent to and received easily (with no protocol) such as
data input from a bar code reader or data output to a printer.
Note Use the TXD(236)/RXD(235) instructions for Serial Communications Boards
and the TXDU(256)/RXDU(255) instructions for Serial Communications Units.
Serial Communications Unit (unit Ver. 1.2 or later)
Serial Communications Board (unit Ver. 1.2 or later)
CPU Unit (unit Ver. 3.0 or later) CPU Unit (unit Ver. 3.0 or later)
TXDU/RXDU TXDU/RXDU
General-purpose external device with serial port General-purpose external device with serial port
(e.g, bar code reader or printer) (e.g, bar code reader or printer)
Addition of a start code at the beginning of the data, and end code at the end
of the data (or specifying the number of receive data bytes) is possible before
sending/receiving. The RS and CS control signals can also be controlled.
Note No-protocol mode is only supported for RS-422A/485 if the four-wire
method is used.
250
Overview Section 7-1
7-1-2 Specifications
Item Description
Communications Full-duplex
mode
Messages (commu- Set either of the following types in the Setup Area in the allo-
nications frame cation DM Area.
structure) 1. Data only (without start code and end code)
2. Start code + data
3. Data + end code
4. Start code + data + end code
5. Data + CR + LF
6. Start code + data +CR + LF
Set in allocated DM Area
(The start code can be included by setting to between 00 and
FF hex, and the end code can be included by setting to
between 00 and FF hex. To exclude the end code, set the
number of receive data bytes.)
Start code None, or 00 to FF hex
End code None, 00 to FF hex, or CR + LF
Number of Set the number of receive data bytes between
receive data 1 and 256 bytes (according to the DM Area
bytes during settings) when frame structure 1 or 2 above is
reception used.
Sending messages • Serial Communications Board: TXD(236) instruction
• Serial Communications Unit: TXDU(256) instruction
Receiving messages • Serial Communications Board: RXD(235) instruction
• Serial Communications Unit: RXDU(255) instruction
Maximum message Sending and receiving: Up to 259 bytes including the start
length code and end code (up to 256 bytes excluding start/end
codes)
Data conversion No conversion
Communications None
protocol
Message delay time When the TXD(236) or TXDU(256) instruction is executed,
after the send delay time, the data is sent from the port.
0 to 300 s (0 to 300,000 ms)
(Can be set in 10-ms units, depending on the DM Area set-
tings)
Receive counter The number of data bytes (0 to 256) received at the port can
be counted.
Reception buffer The reception buffer is cleared immediately after executing the
clear timing RXD(235)/RXDU(255) instruction
Note 1. For multiple start codes, the first start code is enabled.
2. For multiple end codes, the first end code is enabled.
251
Allocation DM Area for No-protocol Mode Section 7-2
3. If the end code will overlap with the send/receive data and cause data re-
ception to be interrupted, use CR+LF as the end code.
4. If the send delay is set in the allocation DM Area when sending TXD(236)
or TXDU(256) (no-protocol mode), data will be sent when the send delay
time has lapsed after execution of TXD(236) or TXDU(256), as shown be-
low.
Send delay
Send
Time
TXD(236)
252
Allocation DM Area for No-protocol Mode Section 7-2
253
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 7-3
254
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 7-3
Note 1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag)
(non-fatal error) will be ON.
2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON.
For details on errors, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
255
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 7-3
Status Area
The Status Area is used to read the Serial Communications Board’s or Unit’s
setting status, communications status, transmission control signal status, and
transmission error status.
Direction: Board/Unit to CPU Unit (input)
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Board Unit
(CS Series (CS/CJ Series)
only)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
1901 n+1 02 to 15 Reserved
01 1: Error log data error 0: Error log data normal
00 Not used
1902 n+2 00 to 15 Reserved
1903 n+3 00 to 15 Reserved
1904 n+4 00 to 15 Reserved
256
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 7-3
Note The port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area are stored. If the
Board/Unit is operating on default settings due to a System Setup error the
default settings will be stored.
257
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 7-3
258
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 7-3
259
Basic Operating Procedure in No-protocol Mode Section 7-4
Instruction Execution
Executing in Ladder Program
• Execute the TXD(236) or TXDU(256) instruction when sending data to an
external device from the PLC.
Note (a) When using the TXD(236) instruction to send to a Serial Commu-
nications Board, include a NO condition of the Send Ready Flag
(bit A35605/A35613) in an AND in the input condition.
(b) When sending the TXDU(256) instruction to a Serial Communica-
tions Unit, include a NO condition of the Communications Port
Enabled Flags (bits A20200 to A20207) and a NC condition of the
TXDU(256) Executing Flag (word n+9/n+19, bit 05) in an AND in
the input condition.
• Execute the RXD(235) or RXDU(255) instruction when receiving data at
the PLC from an external device.
Note (a) When sending the RXD(235) instruction to the Board or the
RXDU(255) instruction to the Unit, include a NO condition for the
Reception Completed Flag (bit A35606/A35614 for the Board or
word n+9/n+19, bit 06 for the Unit) in an AND in the input condi-
tion.
(b) When sending the RXDU(255) instruction to the Unit, also include
a NO condition for the Communications Enabled Flag (bits
A20200 to A20207) in an AND in the input condition.
For details on the TXD(236), RXD(235), TXDU(256), and RXDU(255) instruc-
tions, refer to the CS/CJ-series Instructions Reference Manual (W340).
260
Basic Operating Procedure in No-protocol Mode Section 7-4
SG
+5 V
Serial Communications Unit/Board
261
Basic Operating Procedure in No-protocol Mode Section 7-4
262
SECTION 8
Using 1:N NT Links
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use 1:N NT Links to Programmable Terminals.
263
Overview of 1:N NT Links Section 8-1
PT PT
Note 1. Set the serial port on the PT to a 1:N NT Link. The Serial Communications
Board or Unit will not be able to communicate if the PT port is set for a 1:1
NT Link. Connection is not possible to PTs that do not support 1:N NT
Links.
2. The number of PTs that can be connected to one port is limited by the CPU
Unit’s cycle time when a Serial Communications Board or Unit is used in a
1:N NT Link, as shown in the following diagrams. Although some commu-
nications will be possible even if these restrictions are exceeded, commu-
nications errors will occur depending on the PT operating conditions and
communications load. Always abide by these restrictions.
3. The Programming Console functions of the PT (Expansion Mode) cannot
be used when connected to Serial Communications Board or Unit ports.
They can be used only by connecting to the peripheral port or RS-232C
port on the CPU Unit.
4. Set a unique unit number for each PT connected to the same PLC. If the
same unit number is set for more than one PT, malfunctions will occur.
264
Overview of 1:N NT Links Section 8-1
5. NT Link serial communications are unique and are not compatible with oth-
er serial communications modes.
Example for NT31/NT631(C) PTs
Priority
Registered
Priority Not
Registered
6. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30, NT30C, NT620, NT620C, and NT625C can-
not be used if the cycle time of the CPU Unit is 800 ms or longer (even if
only one of these PTs is used in a 1:N NT Link).
7. With some PTs, timeout settings can be changed to eliminate some of the
communications errors. Refer to the operation manual for the PT for de-
tails.
8. If more PTs are required by the system than allowed by the above restric-
tions, connect the PTs in smaller groups to different ports and increase the
number ports by adding Serial Communications Units or a Serial Commu-
nications Board (if one is not already being used).
265
Setup Area Allocations Section 8-2
266
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 8-3
Note With CS-series, a high-speed NT Link is available only with Serial Communi-
cations Boards or Serial Communications Units manufactured on or after
December 20th, 1999. With earlier models, only standard NT Link is available.
NT31/631(C)-V2 are the only PTs for which high-speed NT link is supported.
Except for the baud rate, the 1:N NT Link communications specifications are
fixed. Therefore, the port settings, start bits, stop bits, and parity need not be
set. Even if they are set, they are ignored.
Serial Communications Set the serial communications mode to 2 Hex to use 1:N NT Link mode.
Mode
Maximum 1:N NT Links With 1:N NT Links, up to eight Programmable Terminals (PTs) can be con-
Unit No. nected. The highest connected unit number is set here.
267
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 8-3
Inner Board Error A424 contains error information for the Serial Communications Board.
Information (CS-series Word Bit Contents
Serial Communications
A424 12 to 15 Non-fatal Reserved
Board Only) errors
11 1 Error log EEPROM error; 0: Normal
(Note 1)
10 1: Protocol macro execution error; 0: Normal
This bit will be turned ON when code 3, 4, or 5 is
stored in the error code for bits 00 to 03 of CIO 1909
or CIO 1919 in the CIO Area,
09 1: Protocol data error (SUM error); 0: Normal
08 1: Setup error; 0: Normal
07 1: Routing table error; 0: Normal
06 Reserved
05 1: Cyclic monitoring error; 0: Normal
04 Reserved
03 Fatal Reserved
02 errors Reserved
(Note 2)
01 1: Inner Bus error; 0: Normal
00 1: Inner Board watchdog timer error; 0: Normal
Note 1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag)
(non-fatal error) will be ON.
2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON.
For details on errors, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
268
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 8-3
Serial Communications Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for a Status
Boards (CS Series Only) Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area
with 1:N NT Links.
Inner Board CIO Area
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words Usage
CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status
CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 Port 1 status
CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Port 2 status
CIO 1925 to CIO 1999 Reserved
Serial Communications Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are
Units (CS/CJ Series) allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25
words. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status
Area with 1:N NT Links.
CPU Bus Unit Area
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Unit No. Words
Unit No. 0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
n + 1 to n + 4: Unit status
Unit No. 1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
n + 5 to n + 14: Port 1 status
Unit No. 2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574 n + 15 to n + 24: Port 2 status
Unit No. 3 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
Unit No. 4 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
Unit No. 5 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
Unit No. 6 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
Unit No. 7 CIO 1675 to CIO 1694
Unit No. 8 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
Unit No. 9 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
Unit No. A CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
Unit No. B CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
Unit No. C CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
Unit No. D CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
Unit No. E CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
Unit No. F CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
269
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 8-3
270
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 8-3
Note The baud rate that is input to the CPU Unit will depend on the setting in the
System Setup. If the default value is used because of a System Setup error,
this default setting is input.
Error Log EEPROM Error This bit will be set to 1 if an error occurs in reading or writing the error log
stored in EEPROM on the assumption that the EEPROM has reached its use-
ful life. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will
also light. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42411 will turn
ON and the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, indicating a non-
fatal error.
Protocol Data Error This bit will be turned ON if a checksum error is detected in the protocol data
at startup. The checksum is checked for all serial communications modes. If a
Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also flash. If
a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42409 will turn ON, the ERR/
ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and the RDY indicator will flash at 1-
second intervals, indicating a non-fatal error.
The operation of the 1:N NT Links will not be affected by a protocol data error.
Port Setting Status The settings in the Setup Area for the following items will be stored: Serial
communications mode, baud rate, start bits, data length, stop bits, parity,
ports, terminating resistance, terminating resistance, setup error, and port
operating/stopped status. The port operating/stopped status will always be 1
for 1:N NT Links.
Communications Status The flow control and buffer status is stored. This status is not used for 1:N NT
Links. These bits are cleared at startup or when a port is restarted using
STUP(237) or a Port Settings Change Bit (Auxiliary Area).
Protocol Status The bits corresponding to the unit numbers of the connected PTs for which
priority processing has been set and the bits corresponding to the unit num-
bers for which communications are being executed are turned ON.
Words Bit Contents
Boards Unit
(CS Series Only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO CIO n+9 n + 19 15 to 08 PT Priority Registered Flag
1909 1919 07 to 00 PT Communications Execution Flag
CIO CIO n + 10 to n + 20 to 15 to 00 Reserved
1910 to 1920 to n + 14 n + 24
CIO CIO
1914 1924
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
271
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations Section 8-3
272
SECTION 9
Using Modbus-RTU Slave Mode (Unit Version 1.3 or Later)
This section describes the procedure and other information required to use Modbus-RTU slave mode.
273
Modbus-RTU Slave System Section 9-1
The host computer sends a command to the PLC. The PLC processes the
command and returns a response to the host computer. This process is
repeated, allowing the host computer to monitor and control PLC operation.
Note Only Modbus-RTU slave mode is supported. A Modbus-ASCII slave mode is
not supported by the Serial Communications Boards or Serial Communica-
tions Units.
Modbus-RTU Specifications
Item Description
Mode Modbus-RTU slave mode (See note 1.)
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400/57,600/115,200 bps
Default: 19,200 bps
Data length 8 bits (See note 2.)
Parity Odd, even, or none
Default: Even
Stop bits Odd or even parity:1 bit
No parity: 2 bits (See note 3.)
Address setting 1 to 247 (broadcasting: 0) (See note 4.)
range
Frame format Slave address: 1 byte
Function code: 1 byte
Data: 0 to 252 bytes
CRC code: 2 bytes
274
Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-2
EM Area 0
1
DM Area settings are used to
2
: allocate the area for each data
model except for discrete inputs.
Refer to 9-2 Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) for the DM
Area settings to allocate areas. Refer to 9-3-4 Command and Response
Details for details on Modbus-RTU commands.
Note 1. DM Area settings are read when the power is turned ON to the CPU Unit,
when the Serial Communications Board/Unit is restarted, or when the port
is restarted. Always cycle the power to the CPU Unit or restart the Serial
Communications Board/Unit or port after changing the settings.
2. Addresses in Modbus data models start from 1, but addresses specified in
Modbus-RTU commands and addresses in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
start from 0. To access address 0 in an area allocated in the CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit, specify address 100 in the Modbus-RTU command.
275
Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-2
276
Setup Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-2
Port Settings The setting for the port settings determine if the default settings or user set-
tings will be used for port 1 and port 2. Be sure to use the same settings as
the communications port on the host computer connected via the Modbus-
RTU Slave System.
If the default port settings are specified, then the setting of bits 00 and 01 and
the baud rate in D32001 will be ignored.
The default settings used are as follows: Baud rate: 19,200 bps, start bits:
1 bit, data length: 8 bits, parity: even, and stop bits: 1 bit.
If user port settings are specified, set bits 00 and 01 and set the baud rate in
D32001.
277
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Serial Communications Set the serial communications mode to A hex to use Modbus-RTU Slave com-
Mode munications.
Parity and Baud Rate If user settings are specified for the port settings, the parity and baud rate
must be set.
Modbus-RTU Slave Set the Modbus-RTU slave address to between 1 and 247 (1 and F7 hex).
Address
Note 1. Bits in the following word addresses can be accessed in the CIO Area for
Coils: CIO 0 to CIO 4095
2. An EM bank can be allocated to the Holding Registers by specifying a val-
ue from either 50 to 5C hex or A0 to AC hex (for EM bank 0 to C).
3. Addresses in Modbus data models start from 1, but addresses specified in
Modbus-RTU commands and addresses in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
start from 0. Refer to the above table when specifying addresses in appli-
cations.
278
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
munications Board ports. When changing the settings and restarting the port
have been completed, the bit will automatically be turned OFF.
Note These bits are used both to change the port settings and to restart the port at
the same time. One of these bits can be turned ON to restart a port without
changing the port settings in the Setup Area allocated in the DM Area. The
STUP(237) instruction can also be used to just restart a communications port
by executing STUP(237) with the same port settings as the ones already
being used.
Serial Communications Boards (CS Series only)
Inner Board Error A424 contains error information for the Serial Communications Board.
Information (CS-series Word Bit Contents
Serial Communications
A424 12 to 15 Non-fatal Reserved
Board Only) errors
11 1 Error log EEPROM error; 0: Normal
(Note 1)
10 1: Protocol macro execution error; 0: Normal
This bit will be turned ON when code 3, 4, or 5 is
stored in the error code for bits 00 to 03 of CIO 1909
or CIO 1919 in the CIO Area,
09 1: Protocol data error (SUM error); 0: Normal
08 1: Setup error; 0: Normal
07 1: Routing table error; 0: Normal
06 Reserved
05 1: Cyclic monitoring error; 0: Normal
04 Reserved
03 Fatal Reserved
02 errors Reserved
(Note 2)
01 1: Inner Bus error; 0: Normal
00 1: Inner Board watchdog timer error; 0: Normal
Note 1. When any one of bits 05 to 11 is ON, A40208 (Inner Board Error Flag)
(non-fatal error) will be ON.
2. When bit 00 or 01 is ON, A40112 (Inner Board Fatal Error Flag) will be ON.
For details on errors, refer to Section 11 Troubleshooting and Maintenance.
9-3-2 CIO Area Allocations
Words in the CIO Area are allocated for a Status Area, which contains status
and error information for the Serial Communications Board or Unit. These
allocations are described in this section.
279
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Serial Communications Words CIO 1900 to CIO 1999 in the Inner Board Area are used for a Status
Boards (CS Series only) Area. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status Area
with Modbus-RTU Slave communications.
Inner Board CIO Area
CIO 1900 to CIO 1999
Words Usage
CIO 1901 to CIO 1904 Board status
CIO 1905 to CIO 1914 Port 1 status
CIO 1915 to CIO 1924 Port 2 status
Serial Communications Words CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the CIO Area are
Units (CS/CJ Series) allocated according to the unit number setting. Each Unit is allocated 25
words. Only the words shown in the following table are used for the Status
Area with Modbus-RTU Slave communications.
CPU Bus Unit Area
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Unit No. Words
Unit No. 0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
n + 1 to n + 4: Unit status
Unit No. 1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
n + 5 to n + 14: Port 1 status
Unit No. 2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
n + 15 to n + 24: Port 2 status
Unit No. 3 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
Unit No. 4 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
Unit No. 5 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
Unit No. 6 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
Unit No. 7 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
Unit No. 8 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
Unit No. 9 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
Unit No. A CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
Unit No. B CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
Unit No. C CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
Unit No. D CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
Unit No. E CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
Unit No. F CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
Status Area The Status Area is used for status information input from Serial Communica-
tions Board or Unit to the CPU Unit. The Status Area is where the Serial Com-
munications Board or Unit set communications status, the transmission
control signal status, and the transmission error status.
n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Words Bit Contents
Boards Units
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO 1901 n+1 02 to 15 Reserved
01 1: Error log EEPROM error 0: Error log EEPROM normal
00 1: Protocol data error 0: Protocol data normal
CIO 1902 n+2 00 to 15 Reserved
CIO 1903 n+3 00 to 15 Reserved
CIO 1904 n+4 00 to 15 Reserved
280
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
281
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Note 1. The settings in the Setup Area are reflected here. The default settings will
be used and will be stored here if a setup error occurs.
2. Always 1 (1 stop bit) when there is parity and always 0 (2 stop bits) when
there is no parity.
3. The status of this bit is not stable in Modbus-RTU Slave mode.
4. Always 0 in Modbus-RTU Slave mode.
Error Log EEPROM Error This bit will be set to 1 if an error occurs in reading or writing the error log
stored in EEPROM on the assumption that the EEPROM has reached its use-
ful life. If a Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will
also light. If a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42411 will turn
ON and the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, indicating a non-
fatal error.
Protocol Data Error This bit will be turned ON if a checksum error is detected in the protocol data
at startup. The checksum is checked for all serial communications modes. If a
Serial Communications Unit is being used, the ERC indicator will also flash. If
a Serial Communications Board is being used, A42409 will turn ON, the ERR/
ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will flash, and the RDY indicator will flash at 1-
second intervals, indicating a non-fatal error.
The operation of Modbus-RTU Slave communications is not affected by a pro-
tocol data error.
Port Setting Status The settings in the Setup Area for the following items will be stored: Serial
communications mode, baud rate, start bits, data length, stop bits, parity,
ports, terminating resistance, setup error, and port operating/stopped status.
The port operating/stopped status will always be 1 for Modbus-RTU Slave
mode.
Communications Status The flow control and buffer status is stored. This status is not used in the Mod-
bus-RTU slave mode. These bits are cleared at startup or when a port is
restarted using STUP(237) or a Port Settings Change Bit (Auxiliary Area).
Transmission Control The status of the following transmission control signals is stored: ER signal,
Signal Status DTR signal, CTS signal, and RTS signal. 1: High, 0: Low
Transmission Error Status The Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON if any of the following flags
turn ON: CRC error (bit 07), Overrun Error (bit 04), Framing Error (bit 03), or
Parity Error (bit 02).
Number of Normally The number of normal Modbus-RTU commands received from the communi-
Received Commands cations port is stored.
Number of Normally Sent The number of normal Modbus-RTU responses sent to the communications
Responses port is stored.
Number of Overrun Errors, The number of overrun errors, framing errors, and parity errors that has
Framing Errors, and Parity occurred is stored.
Errors
Number of CRC Errors The number of CRC errors that has occurred is stored.
Number of Command The number of illegal function codes and illegal addresses in received Mod-
Format Errors bus-RTU commands is stored.
Note The above counters (number of normally received commands, number of nor-
mally sent responses, number of overrun errors, framing errors, and parity
errors, number of CRC errors, and number of command format error) are
cleared to 0 when the power supply to the Serial Communications Board/Unit
282
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Note The CRC code is given in the order low byte, high byte.
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 01 hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0000 to FFFF hex (See note.)
Quantity of Coils 2 bytes 1 to 3E8 hex (1 to 1000)
283
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 01 hex
Byte Count 1 byte N
Coil Status n byte n = N or N+1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 1 31 1 30 0 29 1 28 1 27 1 26 1 25 0 24 0 23 1 22 1 21 0 20 1 19 18 17 16
CIO 2 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 1 37 0 36 1 35 0 34 1 33 1 32 0
CIO 3 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Note The subscript numbers in the shaded boxes indicate the ON/OFF (1/0) status
of the bits that are read.
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 02 hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0000 to 13FF hex
Quantity of Coils 2 bytes 1 to 3E8 hex (1 to 1000)
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 02 hex
Byte Count 1 byte N (See note.)
Coil Status n byte n = N or N+1
284
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 1 31 1 30 0 29 1 28 1 27 1 26 1 25 0 24 0 23 1 22 1 21 0 20 1 19 18 17 16
CIO 2 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 1 37 0 36 1 35 0 34 1 33 1 32 0
CIO 3 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Note The subscript numbers in the shaded boxes indicate the ON/OFF (1/0) status
of the bits that are read.
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 03 hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0 to 7FFF hex (See note.)
Quantity of Registers 2 bytes 1 to 7D hex
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 03 hex
Byte Count 1 byte N × 2 (See note.)
Register Value N × 2 bytes
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1000 A B 1 2
D1001 5 6 7 8
D1002 9 7 1 3
285
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 04 hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0 to 17FF hex (See note.)
Quantity of Registers 2 bytes 1 to 7D hex
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 04 hex
Byte Count 1 byte N × 2 (See note.)
Register Value N × 2 bytes
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1000 A B 1 2
D1001 5 6 7 8
D1002 9 7 1 3
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 05 hex
Output Address 2 bytes 0 to FFFF hex (See note.)
Output Value 2 bytes 0000 hex (OFF) or FF00 (ON)
286
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 05 hex
Output Address 2 bytes 0 to FFFF hex
Output Value 2 bytes 0000 hex (OFF) or FF00 (ON)
Writing 1 (ON) to
CIO 0002.02 Request Response
Data Data
Function Code 05 hex Function Code 05 hex
Output Address (H) 00 hex Output Address (H) 00 hex
Output Address (L) 22 hex Output Address (L) 22 hex
Output Value (H) FF hex Output Value (H) FF hex
Output Value (L) 00 hex Output Value (L) 00 hex
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 1 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
CIO 2 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
CIO 3 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Note The shaded number indicate the ON/OFF status of the bit that is written.
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 06 hex
Register Address 2 bytes 0 to 7FFF hex (See note.)
Register Value 2 bytes 0 to FFFF hex
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 06 hex
Register Address 2 bytes 0 to 7FFF hex
Register Value 2 bytes 0 to FFFF hex
287
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D2000 3 A C 5
D2001
D2002
Diagnostic
Function Executes an echoback test. Send data will be returned.
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 08 hex
Sub-function Code 2 bytes 0 hex
Data N × 2 bytes (See note.) ---
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 08 hex
Sub-function Code 2 bytes 0 hex
Data N × 2 bytes (See note.) ---
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 0F hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0 to FFFF hex
Quantity of Output 2 bytes 1 to 3E8 hex
Byte Count 1 byte N
Output Value n byte n = N or N + 1
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 0F hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0 to FFFF hex
Quantity of Output 2 bytes 1 to7B0 hex
288
Auxiliary Area and CIO Area Allocations (Modbus-RTU Slave Mode) Section 9-3
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CIO 1 31 0 30 0 29 0 28 1 27 0 26 0 25 1 24 1 23 1 22 0 21 1 20 0 19 0 18 0 17 0 16 0
Note The subscript numbers in the shaded boxes indicate the ON/OFF (1/0) status
of the bits that are written. Other bits in the same word are set to 0.
Command
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 10 hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0 to 7FFF hex
Quantity of Registers 2 bytes 1 to 7B hex
Byte Count 1 byte N × 2 (See note.)
Registers Value N × 2 bytes value
Response
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte 10 hex
Starting Address 2 bytes 0 to 17FF hex
Quantity of Registers 2 bytes 1 to7B hex
289
Communications Timing Section 9-4
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D1000 3 A C 5
D1001 9 7 1 3
Error Format
Length Data
Function Code 1 byte Function code + 80 hex
Exception Code 1 byte Error code
290
Communications Timing Section 9-4
5 Instruction 1
1 Instruction 2
6 Instruction 3
3 Instruction 4
7 Instruction 5
2 Instruction 6
0 Instruction 7
4 Instruction 8
Note 1. If more than eight communications instructions are being used, then exclu-
sive control must be performed to make sure that not more than eight are
executed at the same time. Refer to descriptions of network communica-
tions instructions in the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Refer-
ence Manual (W342).
2. The same communications port numbers are used by both the communi-
cations instructions (SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)) and the
PROTOCOL MACRO instruction (PMCR(260)). The same port number
cannot be used by more than one of these instructions at the same time.
291
Communications Timing Section 9-4
tion is completed. When creating the ladder diagram, use these flags as input
conditions when executing these instructions.
Word Bit Content
A202 08 to 15 Reserved
07 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 7
06 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 6
05 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 5
04 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 4
03 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 3
02 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 2
01 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 1
00 Communications Port Enabled Flag, Port No. 0
Communications Port A Communications Port Error Flag will turn ON in the following cases.
Error Flags • When an error is generated during execution of SEND(090), RECV(098),
or CMND(490).
• When an error response or retry error has been generated for the port.
These Flags will turn OFF when the corresponding Communications Port
Enabled Flag is turned OFF at the start of operation or at the start of execut-
ing the SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490).
Word Bit Content
A219 08 to 15 Reserved
07 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 7
06 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 6
05 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 5
04 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 4
03 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 3
02 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 2
01 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 1
00 Communications Port Error Flag, Port No. 0
Communications Port The Communications Port Completion Code words will contain the FINS end
Completion Codes code after SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) has been executed.
If the Communications Port Enabled Flag turns OFF when operation is started
or SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) are executed, the contents of
these words will be cleared.
Word Content
A203 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 0
A204 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 1
A205 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 2
A206 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 3
A207 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 4
A208 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 5
A209 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 6
A210 Communications Port Completion Code, Port No. 7
A211 to A218 Reserved
292
Communications Timing Section 9-4
Flag Transitions
Communications Port
Enabled Flag
Communications Port
Error Flag
Communications Port
Completion Code
(Normal end) (No unit correspond- (Normal end)
End of previous ing to unit address)
processing
No Response Required
Command transmission to the host computer can start even when the port is
receiving a command from the host computer (1). The transmission of a
response to the command from the host computer is postponed until the
transmission of the command to the host computer is completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
293
Communications Timing Section 9-4
No Response Required
At (1) in the diagram, the response to a command sent from the host com-
puter is being transmitted from the port. In this case, the command transmis-
sion to the host computer is postponed until the response transmission is
completed (2).
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
No Response Required
When response wait time has been set in the command format from the host
computer, commands to the host computer will not be transmitted until the
response time has elapsed (1). Transmission of responses to commands from
the host computer will be postponed until the command transmission to the
host computer has been completed (2).
294
Changes from Previous Products Section 9-5
When a response is not required from the host computer, the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag will turn ON when the command to the host computer
has passed from the CPU Unit to the port.
295
Changes from Previous Products Section 9-5
296
Changes from Previous Products Section 9-5
Note The number of words that can be read and written per frame (i.e., the text
lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-series Modbus-RTU
Slave Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Boards/Units. A host
computer program previously used for C-series Modbus-RTU Slave Units may
not function correctly if used for CS/CJ-series PLCs. Check the host computer
program before using it and make any corrections required to handle different
frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communications Commands
Reference Manual (W342) for details.
Note For pre-Ver. 1.2 Units, the number of words that can be read and written per
frame (i.e., the text lengths) when using C-mode commands is different for C-
series Modbus-RTU Slave Units and CS/CJ-series Serial Communications
Boards/Units. A host computer program previously used for C-series Modbus-
RTU Slave Units may not function correctly if it is used in CS/CJ-series PLCs.
When using Serial Communications Boards/Units with Unit Ver. 1.2 or later,
these programs can be reused by setting the Modbus-RTU Slave compatible
device mode to mode C (C500/120) or mode D (D200H). (Alternatively, check
the host computer program before using it and make any corrections required
to handle different frame text lengths. Refer to the CS/CJ-series Communica-
tions Commands Reference Manual (W342) for details.)
297
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 9-6
298
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 9-6
Note The differences between the command and response frames for 1:N Modbus-
RTU Slaves and 1:1 Modbus-RTU Slaves is as follows:
EM Area 0
1
DM Area settings are used to
2
: allocate the area for each data
model except for discrete inputs.
• Response Format
@ 0 0 R D 0 0 × × * CR
• Response Format
R D 0 0 * CR
299
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 9-6
• When the command for reading the status of the CPU Unit (MS) is
received, the response format that is returned to the host according to the
FAL/FALS instruction execution status is different.
Command Name
MS PROCESSOR STATUS READ
300
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 9-6
Note 1. The response data formats for MS commands when FAL/FALS is not exe-
cuted are as follows:
Types for which a space (20 hex) is added to the FAL/FALS message in the
response data (indicated as fixed length in the above table).
Types for which a FAL/FALS message is not added to the response data
(indicated as variable length in the above table).
(A FAL/FALS message is added to the response data for both types if FAL/
FALS is executed.)
2. The following condition is an exception:
When reusing the RG command created using a CVM1/CV-series PLC
with mode B selected, the host computer program cannot be reused with-
out being changed. The difference in the response returned when the RG
command is reused and the Timer/Counter Flag for 121 words (maximum
text area) is read is as follows:
Using mode B with a CS/CJ-series First frame
Serial Communications Unit/Board 121 words (including terminator)
with unit version 1.2 or later
301
Modbus-RTU Slave Function for Replacing Existing PLCs Section 9-6
302
SECTION 10
Loopback Test
This section describes the procedure and other information required to conduct loopback test to check the serial ports.
303
Executing Loopback Tests Section 10-1
RS-232C Port
Pin Signal
2 SD
3 RD
4 RTS
5 CTS
1 FG
8 DTR
7 DSR
RS-422A/485 Port
Pin Signal
1 SDA
2 SDB
6 RDA
8 RDB
10-1-3 Procedure
The loopback test is performed using the procedure shown below.
1,2,3... 1. Connect the connector of the port to be used to execute the loopback test.
See 10-1-2 Connection Method for details.
2. Set the serial communications mode in the Setup Area to Loopback Test
(F Hex). Refer to 10-2 Setup Area Allocations.
3. Set the following communications settings for the loopback test in the Set-
up Area: Baud rate, stop bits, parity, and data length. Refer to 10-2 Setup
Area Allocations.
4. Cycle the power, restart the Unit or Board, or restart the port.
Use the following bits to restart the Board or Unit.
Board: A60800
Units: A501, bits 00 to 15 (bits correspond to unit numbers 0 to F)
Use the following bits to restart the port.
Board: A636, bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2
Units: A620 + unit number, bit 01 for port 1 and bit 02 for port 2
304
Setup Area Allocations Section 10-2
5. Turn ON the Loopback Test Switch. To end the test, turn OFF the switch.
The Loopback Test Switches are as follows:
Board: CIO 1900, bit 06 for port 1 and bit 14 for port 2
Unit: n, bit 06 for port 1 and bit 14 for port 2 (n = CIO 1500 + 25 x
Unit No.)
Refer to 10-3 CIO Area Allocations.
6. Use the protocol status to check the results.
Refer to 10-3 CIO Area Allocations.
Serial Communications Set the serial communications mode to F Hex to perform a loopback test.
Mode For the other settings, refer to 4-2 Setup Area Allocations.
305
CIO Area Allocations Section 10-3
Protocol Status The information shown in the following table is input to the CPU Unit in the
protocol status area. If an error occurs, the flags will be turned ON
n = 1500 + 25 × unit number
Word Bit Contents
Board Unit
(CS-series only) (CS/CJ-series)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 1 Port 2
CIO CIO n+9 n + 19 15 Test Error
1909 1919 14 to 09 status Reserved
08 DTR check error
07 CTS check error
06 Reserved
05 Timeout error
04 Parity error
03 Overrun error
02 Framing error
01 Reserved
00 Conveyor error
CIO CIO n + 10 n + 20 15 to 00 Test execution count
1910 1920
CIO CIO n + 11 n + 21 15 to 00 Test error count
1911 1921
CIO CIO n + 12 to n + 22 to 15 to 00 Reserved
1912 to 1922 to n + 14 n + 24
CIO CIO
1914 1924
The test execution count and test error count are cleared at startup. If the
number of tests or the number of test errors is counted to FFFF (hex), the
value of the count will remain at FFFF, but testing will continue.
306
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the troubleshooting and maintenance procedures for the Serial Communications Boards and the
Serial Communications Unit.
307
Indicator Error Displays Section 11-1
308
Indicator Error Displays Section 11-1
Serial Communications For Serial Communications Boards, refer to the following Auxiliary Area word
Board Error Information (A424) as well as the indicator displays shown on the previous page. When an
(A424) error occurs, the corresponding flag is turned ON.
When a fatal error occurs, the ERR and ALM indicators on the CPU Unit will
light. When a non-fatal error occurs, the ERR and ALM indicators on the CPU
Unit will flash. Refer to the indicator error displays.
Note The ERR/ALM indicator will continue to flash even after the cause of a non-
fatal error has been removed for the Serial Communications Board. The indi-
cator can be stopped by clearing the error from a Programming Console or
309
Indicator Error Displays Section 11-1
other Programming Device for errors for bits 05, 07, 08, 09, and 10. Press the
FUN Key and then the MONITOR Key from the Programming Console. Refer
to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for the CX-Programmer procedure.
310
Status Area Error Indications Section 11-2
Status Area Error When an error occurs, the corresponding flag is turned ON.
Information n = CIO 1500 + 25 × unit number
Word Bit Flag name Possible cause Remedy
Boards Units
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
CIO 1901 n+1 01 Error Log data The error log If the problem persists even if the
error EEPROM is faulty. power supply is cycled, replace
the Board/Unit.
00 Protocol data A protocol data If the error persists when protocol
error checksum error has data is retransmitted, replace the
occurred. Board or Unit.
CIO CIO n+6 n + 16 01 System Setup A System Setup Correct the Setup Area settings,
1906 1916 error error has occurred. cycle the power supply, restart
the Unit/Board, or restart the
port, or execute the STUP(237)
instruction.
CIO CIO n+7 n + 17 10 Remote node The remote node is Cancel the communications with
1907 1917 receive busy in reception buffer the remote node until this flag is
busy status when turned OFF.
flow control is set for
the protocol.
08 Local node The local node is in Increase the transmission interval
receive busy reception buffer busy to reduce transmission load to
status. the remote node for which flow
control is set.
311
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
11-3 Troubleshooting
This section describes how to resolve transmission and reception problems.
“m” and “n” in the tables represent the following word addresses for the
Board and Unit.
Symbol Boards Units
(CS Series only) (CS/CJ Series)
m D32000 D30000 + 100 x unit number
n CIO 1900 CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number
312
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
313
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
314
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
315
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
316
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
Note The System Setup cannot be changed unless the power supply is cycled, the
Board or Unit is restarted, the port is restarted, or the STUP(237) instruction
is executed. Refer to 1-7 Comparison to Previous Products for details.
317
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
318
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
319
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
320
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
321
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
322
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
323
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
324
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
325
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
326
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
327
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
328
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
329
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
330
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
331
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
332
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
333
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
334
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
335
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
Note 1. The PT serial port must be set for a 1:N NT Link. The PT will not be able
to communicate with a Serial Communications Board or Unit if the PT is
set for a 1:1 NT Link.
2. The System Setup cannot be changed unless the power supply is cycled,
the Board or Unit is restarted, the port is restarted, or the STUP(237) in-
struction is executed. Refer to 1-7 Comparison to Previous Products for de-
tails.
336
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
337
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
338
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
339
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
340
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
341
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
Note The following table shows the measures to correct the errors indicated by net-
work communications end codes (A203 to A210).
342
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
Note The following table shows the measures to correct the errors indicated in bits
00 to 03 (Error Code) of words allocated in the CIO Area words n+9/n+19.
343
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
344
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
345
Troubleshooting Section 11-3
346
Error Logs Section 11-4
EEPROM Error Log Table Records of errors that are particularly serious are logged in both the RAM
error log table and the EEPROM error log table in the Board or Unit when they
occur. The contents of errors logged in the EEPROM error log table remain
even if the power to the Board or Unit is turned OFF or the Board or Unit is
restarted. The contents of the EEPROM error log table is automatically read
to the RAM error log table when the power is turned ON. One record is logged
in the EEPROM error log table for each error that occurs for up to 32 errors
max.
When the number of errors recorded in the RAM error log table reaches 64 (or
32 records for the EEPROM error log table), the oldest records will be deleted
to store the most recent errors.
347
Error Logs Section 11-4
Error Codes and Details Refer to the list of error codes and details on page 348.
Time of Error The time the error occurred is recorded including the year (rightmost two dig-
its), month, day, hour, minute, and second in 1-byte BCD (binary coded deci-
mal).
Reading and Clearing The error log table can be read or cleared using FINS commands sent to the
Error Log Tables Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit. Refer to 11-4-6
Reading and Clearing Error Log Tables for details.
Note The Serial Communications Board and Serial Communications Unit use the
time information read from the CPU Unit. If the time cannot be read from the
CPU Unit, the time of the error in the error log will be recorded as all zeros.
For all CS/CJ-series PLCs, the time of the CPU Unit’s built-in clock must be
set when the power is turned ON after the battery is mounted. If the built-in
clock time is not set, the time recorded in the error log will be incorrect, and
when the error log is read, the time will be irregular.
348
Error Logs Section 11-4
349
Error Logs Section 11-4
350
Error Logs Section 11-4
Command Format
05 01
Command
code
Response Format
05 01 20 bytes 20 bytes
351
Error Logs Section 11-4
• Version: "V1.00V1.00V1.00V1.00"
Trace function version
Command Format
21 02
Response Format
21 02 10 bytes 10 bytes
Command End code Max. no. of No. of No. of Error log Error log
code stored records stored records data data
records
352
Error Logs Section 11-4
ing from the beginning record number. The total number of bytes for the error
log data required is calculated as follows:
No. of records x 10 bytes
The configuration of each error log record is returned in 10 bytes, as follows:
1st byte 10th byte
07 01
Comments If the error log does not contain the specified number of records, the records
up to the last recorded stored at the time the command was executed will be
returned, and a normal response will be returned. The number of records
actually read will be returned as the number of stored records.
If the beginning record is specified higher than the current number of records
in the error log, an end code of 1103 Hex will be returned.
If the beginning record number is specified as 0000, the response will be com-
pleted normally, even if no error log is recorded.
If the number of records is set to 0000, the end code will be returned as 110C
Hex.
Command Format
21 03
Command
code
Response Format
21 03
Comments The ERROR LOG CLEAR: 21 03 command clears the error log records that
are stored in the RAM error log table and the EEPROM error log table.
353
Cleaning and Inspection Section 11-5
11-5-1 Cleaning
To keep the Serial Communications Board in optimum condition, regularly
clean the Board or Unit, as follows:
• Wipe the surface of the Board or Unit daily with a soft, dry cloth.
• If any dirt cannot be removed with a dry cloth, moisten the cloth with a
mild detergent diluted to 2%, and squeeze out any excess moisture
before wiping the Board or Unit.
• Do not adhere materials, such as gum, vinyl, or tape to the Board or Unit
for long periods of time. Doing so may cause scratches on the device.
Remove any adhered materials when cleaning the Board or Unit.
Note Never use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not use
chemically treated cloths.
11-5-2 Inspection
To keep the Board or Unit in optimum condition, regular inspections must be
performed. Normally, inspect the devices once every six months or every year.
Inspect the devices at more regular intervals when they are being used in
environments subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or high dust levels.
Materials for Inspection Prepare the following materials before performing any inspections.
Materials Required Daily
For daily inspection, a Phillips screwdriver, flat-blade screwdriver, tester (or
digital voltmeter), industrial strength alcohol, and all-cotton cloth are required.
Materials Required Occasionally
For some inspections, a synchroscope, a pen oscilloscope, a temperature
gage, and a hydroscope will be required.
Inspection Items Inspect the following items to check whether the Board or Unit is operating
within the specified criterion. If the Board or Unit is not within the criterion,
improve the ambient operating environment and readjust the device.
Item Details Criterion Inspection
materials
Operating Check the ambient temperature 0 to 55°C Temperature
environment and the temperature of the control gage
panel.
Check the ambient humidify and 10% to 90% RH Hydroscope
the humidity of the control panel. (no condensa-
tion or icing)
Check for accumulated dust. No dust Visual
inspection
Installation Check that the Board or Unit is Board or Unit ---
mounted securely. must be
mounted
securely.
Check for loose screws on the Screws must be Phillips screw-
communications cables. securely tight- driver
ened.
Check for damaged Cables should Visual
communications cables. be fully intact. inspection
354
Replacement Precautions Section 11-6
Note 1. If the CPU Unit is to be replaced, transfer to the replacement CPU Unit the
contents of the Holding Areas and DM Area required for operating the Unit
before starting operation. If the relationship between the DM Area and
Holding Area and the program is not maintained, unexpected malfunctions
may result.
2. The System Setup of the Serial Communications Board or Unit is saved in
the DM Area of the CPU Unit. If the CPU Unit is to be replaced, either
transfer the System Setup data to the CX-Programmer before replacing
the CPU Unit or reset the System Setup.
1,2,3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PLC to which the Serial Communications Board
or Unit to be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external de-
vices.
2. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Communi-
cations Board or Unit to be replaced, and also remove the Board or Unit.
3. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board or Unit to the same
settings of the Board or Unit being replaced before mounting, as follows:
• Unit number setting switch (Serial Communications Units)
• Terminating resistance switch (RS-422A/485 ports)
355
Replacement Precautions Section 11-6
1,2,3... 1. Connect Programming Console or CX-Protocol to the PLC to which the re-
placement Serial Communications Board or Unit is mounted, and switch to
PROGRAM mode.
2. Save the protocol macro data using the CX-Protocol. Refer to the CX-Pro-
tocol Operation Manual (W344) for details.
3. Turn OFF the power to the PLC to which the Serial Communications Board
or Unit to be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external de-
vices.
4. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Communi-
cations Board or Unit to be replaced, and also remove the Board or Unit.
5. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board or Unit to the same
settings of the Board or Unit being replaced before mounting, as follows:
• Unit number setting switch (Serial Communications Units)
• Terminating resistance switch (RS-422A/485 ports)
• 2-wire or 4-wire switch (RS-422A/485 ports)
6. Turn ON the power of the PLC to which the replacement Serial Communi-
cations Board or Unit is mounted, and to all serially connected external de-
vices, and start operating the system.
7. Switch the CPU Unit to PROGRAM mode, and using the CX-Protocol,
transfer the protocol macro data to the Board or Unit. Refer to the CX-Pro-
tocol Operation Manual (W344) for details.
8. Switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode, and start operating the system.
9. Check from the indicators and status display that the system is operating
normally.
Using the Simple Backup Function
This function can be used with a CS1-H or CJ1-H CPU Unit only.
1,2,3... 1. Check the settings of pins 7 and 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU
Unit. Turn ON pin 7 and turn OFF pin 8 to backup the protocol data from
the Serial Communication Board/Unit to the Memory Card.
2. Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
3. Press and hold the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds.
When the switch is pressed, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU
Unit will flash once and then remain lit while the data is being written. The
Indicator will go OFF after the data has been written properly.
4. If necessary, compare the data in the Memory Card with the protocol data
in the Serial Communication Board/Unit.
To compare the protocol data, turn OFF pins 7 and 8 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and press the Memory Card power supply switch
for 3 seconds. When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the
MCPWR Indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then re-
356
Replacement Precautions Section 11-6
main lit while the data is being compared. If the data matches, the Indicator
will go OFF after the data has been compared.
5. Turn OFF the power to the PLC to which the Serial Communications Board
or Unit to be replaced is mounted, and to all serially connected external de-
vices.
6. Disconnect the communications cables connected to the Serial Communi-
cations Board or Unit to be replaced, and also remove the Board or Unit.
7. Set the hardware switches of the replacement Board or Unit to the same
settings of the Board or Unit being replaced before mounting, as follows:
• Unit number setting switch (Serial Communications Units)
• Terminating resistance switch (RS-422A/485 ports)
• 2-wire or 4-wire switch (RS-422A/485 ports)
8. To restore the protocol data from the Memory Card to the Serial Commu-
nications Board or Unit, turn ON pin 7 and turn OFF pin 8 on the DIP switch
on the front of the CPU Unit for which the Board or Unit was replaced.
9. Turn ON the PLC’s power supply. At this point, leave the power supplies
OFF to all serially connected external devices.
When the PLC’s power is turned ON, the MCPWR Indicator on the front of
the CPU Unit will light and flash once. The MCPWR Indicator will remain
lit while the data is being read. The Indicator will go OFF after the data has
been read properly.
• Serial Communications Board Operation:
The Board’s RDY Indicator will flash during the restore operation and
it will be lit when the restore operation is completed normally.
If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash.
The CPU Unit’s ERR/ALM Indicator will flash and bit A42409 (the Pro-
tocol Data Error Flag) will be turned ON.
• Serial Communications Unit Operation:
The Unit’s RDY Indicator will flash during the restore operation. Both
the RDY Indicator and RUN Indicator will be lit when the restore oper-
ation is completed normally.
If the restore operation fails, the RDY Indicator will continue to flash
and the ERC Indicator will be lit.
If the restore operation fails, return to step 1 and perform the replacement
procedure again. If the restore operation fails two times in succession, use
CX-Protocol to transfer the protocol data to the Board. Refer to Using CX-
Protocol on page 356 for details.
10. If necessary, compare the data in the Memory Card with the protocol data
in the Serial Communication Board/Unit.
To compare the protocol data, turn OFF the PLC’s power supply, turn OFF
pins 7 and 8 on the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit, turn the PLC
ON again, and press the Memory Card power supply switch for 3 seconds.
When the Memory Card power supply switch is pressed, the MCPWR In-
dicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while
the data is being compared. If the data matches, the Indicator will go OFF
after the data has been compared.
11. Turn ON the power to all serially connected external devices, switch the
CPU Unit to MONITOR mode, and start the system.
12. Check the status of the Serial Communications Board or Unit’s indicators
and status display and confirm that the system is operating normally.
357
Replacement Precautions Section 11-6
Note 1. The protocol macro data for the Board or Unit is stored in the flash memory
of the Board or Unit.
2. When protocol macro data designed with the CX-Protocol is used, a back-
up of the protocol macro data created from the CX-Protocol must be trans-
ferred to the Board or Unit after replacing.
3. The System Setup of the Serial Communications Board or Unit is allocated
to the DM Area saved in the battery backup of the CPU Unit, and if the ex-
clusively designed macro data is not used, the System Setup can be used
as before, simply by setting the hardware.
Precautions for Using the When using the Simple Backup Function in CS1H/G-CPU@@H products of
Simple Backup Function Lot No. 011101 or earlier* combined with the Serial Communications Board
(CS1W-SCB@@-V1), proper backup will not be possible if the backup file
(BACKUPE1.PRM) remains in the Memory Card.
*Reading lot numbers
In order to use the Simple Backup Function in this combination, delete the
backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM) inside the Memory Card, then execute the backup.
If backup is executed without deleting this backup file, the RDY LED and the
CPU Unit’s ERR/ARM LED will both flash, and the Protocol Data Error Flag (bit
A42409) will turn ON with the restore operation. The Serial Communications Board
will also automatically delete the backup file (BACKUPE1.PRM).
358
Appendix A
Introduction
Appendices B the N provide information on the standard system protocols provided with the CX-Protocol, the
Serial Communications Boards, and the Serial Communications Units. Refer to 5-4 Using Protocol Macros for
details on using PMCR(260).
PMCR(260)
+4 Send data
359
Introduction Appendix A
Receive data
+2
360
Introduction Appendix A
361
Introduction Appendix A
362
Appendix B
CompoWay/F Master Protocol
The CompoWay/F Master Protocol is used to send CompoWay/F commands with the CS/CJ-series PLC serv-
ing as the host (master).
CompoWay/F
CompoWay/F is a protocol used by many OMRON components for serial communications. A host computer of
a PLC can function as a host (master) to send CompoWay/F commands (message frames) to OMRON compo-
nents, which function as slaves. The components will return responses to these commands. Using CompoWay/
F commands, the host can read/write data, settings, and operating status to control the operation of the com-
ponents.
CompoWay/F has the following features.
• The same message frame format is used, eliminating the need for special protocols for each component.
The same commands can thus be used for serial communications with all CompoWay/F components.
• The CompoWay/F protocol conforms to OMRON’s standard FINS command protocol, providing compatibil-
ity with other networks and more flexible expansions in the future.
The CompoWay/F Master Protocol is provided as a standard system protocol to enable the CS/CJ-series PLC
to execute read/write sequences for CompoWay/F commands.
CompoWay/F response
RS-232C
OMRON CompoWay/F component: Slave
CompoWay/F command
RS-422A/486 Connections
CompoWay/F response
RS-422A/485
CompoWay/F command
363
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Communications Specifications
Item Specification
Transmission path Multipoint
connections
Communications RS-232C, RS-422A/485, 4-wire half-duplex, 2-wire half-duplex
Synchronization Start-stop
Baud rate 1,200/2,400/4,800/9,600/19,200/38,400 bps
Default: 9,600 bps
Transmitted code ASCII
Data length 7 bits or 8 bits (Default: 7 bits)
Note: A 7-bit code is used with 0 added to the beginning.
Stop bits 1 bit or 2 bits (Default: 2 bits)
Error detection Horizontal parity (none, even, or odd) (Default: Even)
BCC (block check character)
*1: Start-stop Sync Data Configuration for Protocol Macros
LRC, 1 byte, equivalent to binary
Transmission Procedure
The PLC or host computer serving as the master sends a command and the component serving as the slave
returns a response for the command message contained in the command. One response message is returned
for each command message. The movement of command and response messages is shown below.
Command message
Master (PLC or host computer)
Slave (component)
Response message
Response Format
Node No. Subaddress End code Response Text
"00" "00" Data
1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes (See note.) 1 byte 1 byte
Note 1. Data is not saved in the response if there is a command frame error (i.e., if the end code is not 00 or
0F).
2. Other values are possible for the subaddress and SID.
364
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
365
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Example
The command and response frames for a K3N@-series Intelligent Signal Processor are shown below.
Command Frame
Node No. Subaddress
"00" "0" Command Text
SID
Data
Response Format
Node No. Subaddress End code
"00" Response Text
Data
Command Response
code code
366
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
1. Variable Type
Variable type Contents
“C0” Present value, maximum value, minimum value, status, and
comparison value
Note If “0000” is specified, nothing will be read and a normal end will be returned. A parameter error will occur
for any settings other than “0000” and “0001.”
Response Text
2. Read Data
The specified data is returned in 8 digits of hexadecimal data.
367
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
368
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
369
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
PMCR(260) Instruction
Response Frame
Node No. Subaddress End code Receive data
"00" "01" "01" Response code Read data
Response code Receive data
PMCR(260) Instruction
#0258
D Number of receive data words
370
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Send data words Send frame "12" "34" "56" "78" 5 6 7 8 Rightmost word
Rightmost word 1 2 3 4 "56" "78" "12" "34" 1 2 3 4 Leftmost word
Leftmost word 5 6 7 8
607 (025F) Send word order: Rightmost to leftmost Receive word order: Rightmost to leftmost
Send data words Send frame Receive frame Receive data words
Rightmost word 1 2 3 4 "12" "34" "56" "78" "12" "34" "56" "78" 1 2 3 4 Rightmost word
Send data
+4
Note 1. Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the
data is converted to ASCII data before being sent.
2. Frames are created and sent starting from the rightmost to leftmost word of the address in I/O mem-
ory.
Send data words Send frame
1 2 3 4 "12" "34" "56" "78"
5 6 7 8
371
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+2 Receive data
Note Received frames are stored starting from the leftmost to rightmost word of the address in I/O memory.
Example: The following example illustrates reading the present value from a K3N@-series Intelligent Signal
Processor.
CS/CJ-series PLC
CompoWay/F response
Read data = present value
Sequence No. 600 (Send with ASCII Conversion, with Response) is used. The specified data beginning with
the command code is converted ASCII and sent to the Intelligent Signal Processor with the specified node
number. The response is converted to hexadecimal and stored starting at the specified word.
The command frame for reading the present value for a K3N@-@@@@-FLK1/2/3/4/5/6 Intelligent Signal Pro-
cessor (command code 01 01) is shown below. The following data is specified in the operands for PMCR(260).
• Rightmost byte of S+1: Node number (2 digits BCD)
• S+2: Command code: MRC + SRC = “0101”
• S+4 on: Send data = Variable type + first read address + 00 + number of elements.
STX Node No. Subad- SID Command code Send data ETX BCC
dress
MRC SRC Variable First read Always No. of ele-
type address 00 ments
(Note)
(02 Hex) (×101) (×101) 00 0 01 01 C0 0000 00 0001 (03 Hex)
372
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Data in shaded portions is stored at the location specified by the operand in the PMCR(260) instruction.
Note 1. Response Codes
Response code Meaning
“0000” Normal end
“1001” Command too long
“1002” Command too short
“1100” Parameter error
“1101” Area type error
“1103” First address range error
“2203” Operating error
2. The read data is returned as 4-digit hexadecimal as follows: F0019999 to 00099999 Hex.
The 3rd and 4th operands of the PMCR(260) instruction are specified as follows.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
Offset Contents (data format) Data
+0 Number of send data words 0007 Hex
(4 digits Hex)
+1 (Undefined) Node No. (2 digits 0000 Hex
BCD)
+2 MRC SRC (2 digits Hex) 0101 Hex
(2 digits Hex)
+3 Number of send bytes (4 digits BCD) 000C Hex
+4 Send data (12 digits Hex) C000 Hex
+5 0000 Hex
+6 0001 Hex
373
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+4 Send data
Note 1. Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the
data is converted to ASCII data before being sent.
2. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data is sent starting from the send data word with
the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming handles data in 4-byte units.
Send data words Send frame
1 2 3 4 "56" "78" "12" "34"
5 6 7 8
374
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+2 Receive data
375
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+5 Send data
+2 Response data
376
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+5 Send data
377
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Connections
Connection methods between a Serial Communications Board or Unit and the K3N@-series Intelligent Signal
Processor are shown below.
RS-232C
• RS-232C connections are one-to-one.
• The max. cable length is 15 m. Use an RS-232C optical interface (Z3RN) when extending the transmission
line beyond 15 m.
• Use shielded, twisted-pair cable.
RD 3 3 RD RX
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
DSR 7 6 DSR
DTR 8 20 DTR
Shield K3N@-@@@@-FLK1
Serial
Communications Intelligent
Unit/Board Signal
Processor
RS-232C RS-232C
MAX232C or equivalent
Abbrevi- Pin Pin Abbrevi-
ation No. No. ation
SG 9 5 SG
SD 2 3 SD TX
RD 3 2 RD RX
RTS 4 7 RTS
CTS 5 8 CTS
DSR 7 6 DSR
DTR 8 4 DTR
1/
Shield
FG Shell K3N@-@@@@-FLK4
378
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Shield
+
Terminal block switch ON at the end station.
Shield
379
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the data is
converted to ASCII data before being sent. The frames are created and sent in order from the leftmost word to
rightmost word of the I/O memory address.
Send data words Send frame
1 2 3 4 "56" "78" "12" "34"
5 6 7 8
The received frames are stored in order from the leftmost word to rightmost word of the I/O memory address.
380
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Set the number of send bytes to twice the number of bytes in memory. This is necessary because the data is
converted to ASCII data before being sent. The frames are created and sent in order from the rightmost word
to leftmost word of the I/O memory address.
Send data words Send frame
1 2 3 4 "12" "34" "56" "78"
5 6 7 8
381
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
The received frames are stored in order from the rightmost word to leftmost word of the I/O memory address.
The received frames are stored in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word of the I/O memory
address.
382
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Set the number of write bytes to twice the number of send data in memory. This is necessary because the data
is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data in the
first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the rightmost word to leftmost word and the
data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder programming
handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
Send data words
0 0 0 3
Send frame
4
1 2 3 4
3 0 0 0 2
0000 0001 0002 0003
2 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
383
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+6
Write data
Set the number of write bytes to twice the number of send data in memory. This is necessary because the data
is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data, data in the
first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word and
the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder program-
ming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
Send data words
0 0 0 3
Send frame
4
1 2 3 4
3 0 0 0 2
0000 0001 0002 0003
2 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
384
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
385
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
+5 Read data
386
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
The received frames are stored in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost word of the I/O memory
address.
Set the number of write bytes to twice the of the actual number of send data bytes. This is necessary because
the data is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data,
data in the first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost
word and the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder
programming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
Send data words
0 0 0 3
Send frame
4
1 2 3 4
3 0 0 0 2
0000 0001 0002 0003
2 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
387
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Set the number of write bytes to twice the of the actual number of send data bytes. This is necessary because
the data is converted to ASCII data before being written. When hexadecimal data is converted to ASCII data,
data in the first write address +0 and +1 is stored in I/O memory in order from the leftmost word to the rightmost
word and the data is sent starting from the send data word with the largest offset. This is done because ladder
programming handles data in 2-word (4-byte) units.
Send data words
0 0 0 3
Send frame
4
1 2 3 4
3 0 0 0 2
0000 0001 0002 0003
2 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 0 0
388
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
389
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Echoback Test
(Sequence No. 620 (Hex 026C))
This sequence executes an echoback test at the specified node.
390
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
Operation Command
(Sequence No. 621 (Hex 026D))
This sequence remotely stops/starts operations of the device at the specified node number.
391
CompoWay/F Master Protocol Appendix B
392
Appendix C
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master
The C-mode (Host Link) command master protocol provides communications sequences using C-mode com-
mand codes for a PLC (CS/CJ Series) host (master).
This protocol enables any C-mode command to be sent from a Serial Communications Unit/Board installed in
a CS/CJ-series PLC to a CS/CJ-series or C-series (see note) CPU Unit that is connected via RS-232C or RS-
422A/485.
Note C-series PLCs refer to the C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z), C120, C500, C500F, C1000HF,
CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A, CPM2A, CPM2C, SRM1, CQM1H, C1000H, and C2000H.
Serial Communications Board/Unit Serial Communications Board/Unit
CS/CJ-series CS/CJ-series
PLC PMCR PLC PMCR
(260)
(260)
C-mode command
Response
C-mode command
Response
• Response Frame
Host Link
"@" unit number Command code End code Text FCS "*" CR
393
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
For details on C-mode command codes for sending to CS/CJ-series CPU Units, refer to the CS/CJ Series
Communications Commands Reference Manual (W342). For details on C-mode command codes for sending
to C-series CPU Units, refer to each of the C-series PLC operation manuals.
394
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
395
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
PMCR(260)
396
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
Response Frame
Host Link Command
"@" unit number code End code Text FCS "*" CR
40 hex (X101)(X100) (X101)(X100) 2A hex 0D hex
PMCR(260)
S
D D Number of receive data words
D+1 End code
(Undefined) (2 digits BCD)
D+2 Receive data (hex)
397
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
Note The read data from the end code area (+1 word, rightmost byte) is stored for responses without end
codes.
398
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
Note The read data from the end code area (+1 word, rightmost byte) is stored for responses without end
codes. Only the data stored in the end code area will be converted into ASCII.
399
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
400
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
401
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
402
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
403
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
404
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
405
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
406
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
407
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
408
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
409
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
410
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
411
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
412
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
413
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
414
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
415
C-mode (Host Link) Command Master Appendix C
416
Appendix D
Host Link FINS Command Master
The Host Link FINS Command Master Protocol provides communications sequences using FINS commands
with the CS/CJ-series PLC as the host (master).
This protocol is used to send user-specified or specific (e.g., MEMORY AREA READ) FINS commands
enclosed in a Host Link header and terminator from a Serial Communications Unit/Board installed in a CS/CJ-
series PLC connected through RS-232C or RS-422A/485 to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit or to a Special I/O Unit
or CPU Bus Unit on the network.
Serial Communications Board/Unit
CS/CJ PLC
PMCR
Network (260)
Communications Unit
CS/CJ or
CVM1/CV PLC
Protocol macro mode
(Host Link master)
Communications Unit
FINS command CPU Unit
Host Link mode (Host Link master) PLC on network Personal computer on network
Communications Board
FINS command
Note The remote destination network address (DNA) specifies the local network address (00 hex), the remote
destination node address (DA1) specifies the local node (00 hex), and the remote destination unit
address (DA2) specifies the CPU Unit in the PLC Slave (00 hex).
2. Sending to a CPU Unit on the Network
Serial Communications Unit/Board Protocol macro mode
PLC master
Host Link mode
FINS command
Note 1. The response monitoring time for both sending methods 1 and 2 is 3 s. These commands can
be sent across up to 3 network levels.
2. Slave-initiated FINS commands sent from the PLC slave to the PLC master are not supported
for either method 1 or 2.
417
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
Response Frame
Host Link
Host Link command code
"@" unit number "F" "A" "00" ICF "C0" RSV "00" GCT "02"
1 0
40 hex (X10 )(X10 ) 46 hex 41 hex 30 hex 30 hex 43 hex 30 hex 30 hex 30 hex 30 hex 32 hex
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
"*" CR
2A hex 0D hex
1 byte 1 byte
418
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
419
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
Item Contents
DNA (Destination The same contents specified for SNA, SA1, and SA2 in the command that was received will be
network address) returned.
DA1 (Destination
node address)
DA2 (Destination
unit address)
SNA (Source net- The same contents specified for DNA, DA1, and DA2 in the command that was received will be
work address) returned.
SA1 (Source node
address)
SA2 (Source unit
address)
SID (Service ID) The SID that was specified in the command that was received will be returned.
Command code, The command code, end code, and text corresponding to the FINS command and response formats
end code, text will be returned.
For details on FINS command codes for sending to CS/CJ-series CPU Units, refer to the CS/CJ Series Com-
munications Commands Reference Manual (W342).
420
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
421
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
Host Link
@ unit number Command Text FCS * CR
40 hex (×101)(×100) code 2A hex 0D hex
PMCR
Response Frame
ICF RSV GCT DNA DA1 DA2
F A 0 0 C 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
× × × × × × 5 5
Host Link
@ unit number End code Text FCS * CR
Command
40 hex (×101)(×100) code 2A hex 0D hex
PMCR(260)
S
D D Number of send data words
D+1 End code (4 digits hex)
User-specified FINS receive data (4 digits hex)
422
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
423
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
424
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
425
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
AR AREA READ
(Sequence No. 753 (Hex 02F1)
This sequence sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecu-
tive AR Area words, and stores the data starting from the designated word.
426
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
DM AREA READ
(Sequence No. 754 (Hex 02F2)
This sequence sends command code 0101 hex to the specified Host Link Unit, reads the contents of consecu-
tive DM Area words, and stores the data starting from the designated word.
427
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
428
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
429
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
430
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
DM AREA WRITE
(Sequence No. 758 (Hex 02F6))
This sequence sends command code 0102 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes data to consecutive
DM Area words.
431
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
432
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
433
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
434
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
DM AREA FILL
(Sequence No. 762 (Hex 02FA))
This sequence sends command code 0103 hex to the specified Host Link Unit and writes the same data to
consecutive DM Area words.
435
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
436
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
437
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
438
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
439
Host Link FINS Command Master Appendix D
440
Appendix E
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master
(A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1)
The Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C frame, model 1) Protocol is used to send user-speci-
fied or specific (e.g., Device Memory Read/Write) Computer Link commands using the A-compatible 1C frame
model 1 control protocol from a CS/CJ-series PLC (CPU Unit) connected through RS-232C or RS-422A to a
Mitsubishi PLC (Sequencer CPU Module installed in a Computer Link Module). This protocol enables the
OMRON PLC to be used as the host (master) to remotely execute RUN/STOP for or read/write the device
memory of a Mitsubishi A/QnA/Q-series PLC that is connected either serially or on a MELSECNET/Ethernet
network.
OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC
Computer Link
command
RS-232C or RS-422A (Computer Link)
Mitsubishi PLC
Computer Link Unit
Communications Specifications
Item Specifications
Protocol Computer Link, A-compatible 1C frame, model 1
Transmission path connec- Multi-point
tion Host (OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC): Mitsubishi Sequencer CPU Module
1:1, 1:n (n = 32 max), m:n (m+n = 32 max)
Note 1: Specifying the PLC number enables access of the specified Sequencer CPU Mod-
ule on the MELSECNET or Ethernet network.
Note 2: Sending data using slave-initiated communications from the Sequence CPU Unit to
the Host (on-demand function) is not supported.
Communications method RS-232C, RS-422A (4-wire, half-duplex)
Synchronization method Start-stop synchronization
Transmission code ASCII
Data length 7, 8 bits
Note: 8-bit units with “0” added to the beginning of the 7-bit code
Stop bits 1, 2 bits
Error detection method Horizontal parity (none, 1 bit)
441
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Checksum
2 bytes
Response Frame
• Normal Response Type 1
Station PLC
STX No. No. Characters (text) ETX Checksum
02 hex @@ hex @@ hex @@ hex @@ hex 03 hex
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte
• Error Response
Station PLC
NAK No. No. Error code
02 hex @@ hex @@ hex @@ hex @@ hex
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes
442
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Item Contents
Device address Specify the addresses for specified device types in hexadecimal.
Device points Specify the number of bits for bit data and the number of words for word data in hexadecimal.
443
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
444
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
445
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
446
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
447
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Word data (Any Device Type Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 802 (Hex 0322)) (Command Code: WR)
This sequence reads the word data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address
for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station
number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the
specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
448
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
449
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Word Data (Any Device Type Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 804 (Hex 0324)) (Command Code: WW)
This sequence writes the word data starting from the specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the
number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in
the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
450
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
451
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 806 (Hex 0326)) (Command Code: BR)
This sequence reads the bit data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for
the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station num-
ber (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the spec-
ified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
452
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
453
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 808 (Hex 0328)) (Command Code: BW)
This sequence writes the bit data starting from the specified word + 6 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the
number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in
the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
454
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
455
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Word Data (All Device Types Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 810 (Hex 032A)) (Command Code: QR)
This sequence reads the word data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address
for the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station
number (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the
specified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
456
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
457
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Word Data (All Device Types Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 812 (Hex 032C)) (Command Code: QW)
This sequence writes the word data starting from the specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the
number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in
the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
458
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
459
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Batch Read as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 814 (Hex 032E)) (Command Code: JR)
This sequence reads the bit data for the number of device points starting from the specified device address for
the specified device type (except T, C) in the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station num-
ber (and the PLC number that follows), converts the data into hexadecimal, and stores it starting from the spec-
ified word + 2 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit.
460
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
461
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Device Memory Fill as Bit Data (All Device Types Except T/C)
(Sequence No. 816 (Hex 0330)) (Command Code: JW)
This sequence writes the bit data starting from the specified word + 7 in the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit to the
number of device points starting from the specified device address for the specified device type (except T, C) in
the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station number (and the PLC number that follows).
462
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
463
Mitsubishi Computer Link Master (A-compatible 1C Frame, Model 1) Appendix E
Loopback Test
(Sequence No. 818 (Hex 0332)) (Command Code: TT)
This sequence executes a loopback test at the Mitsubishi Computer Link Module with the specified station
number (and the PLC number that follows). (E.g, if the data starting from the specified word + 3 is sent from the
host, the Computer Link Module will return the data unchanged to the host.)
464
Appendix F
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol
The E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol reads and controls various parameters in remote mode for the
Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-485 cable.
465
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
Connection Configuration
The connection configuration for using the E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol is shown below.
RS-232C Connection
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series) E5#K
PLC PS
RS-232C
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C
Note 1. The communications configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15
m.
2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable (AWG28i or greater).
466
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
RS-485 Connection
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series) E5#K
PLC PS
RS-485 port
→
RS-485
E5#K
→
RS-485
→
RS-485
Pin No.
Shielded cable
1
2
13 A 13 A
14 B 14 B
A<B: [1] Mark
A>B: [0] Space
467
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
Read Set Point during SP Ramp (Sequence No. 001 (Hex 0001))
Reads the set point during the SP ramp and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of send +0 Number of send data words
data +1 (Undefined) Unit No.
468
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
469
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
470
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
471
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
472
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
Read SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value (Sequence No. 011 (Hex
000B))
Reads the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Unit No.
473
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
474
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
475
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
~ ~
+9 (Undefined) Unit No. (max.)
476
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
477
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
478
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
479
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
480
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
481
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
482
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
Note To read parameters in the setup mode or extended mode, execute Switch to Level 1 (Sequence No. 075)
in advance.
483
E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol Appendix F
484
Appendix G
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol
The E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol writes and controls various settings in remote mode for the Control-
ler connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-485 cable.
Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
485
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
Connections
The connections are the same as that for the E5@K Digital Controller Read Protocol.
486
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
487
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
488
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
Write SP Ramp Time Unit and Set Value (Sequence No. 058 (Hex
003A))
Writes the SP ramp time unit and SP ramp set value.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Unit No.
+2 SP ramp time unit
+3 SP ramp set value
489
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
490
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
491
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
492
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
493
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
494
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
495
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
496
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
497
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
498
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
499
E5@K Digital Controller Write Protocol Appendix G
500
Appendix H
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol
The E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol reads and controls various parameters in remote mode for
the Temperature Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422/485
cable.
Note All sequences in this appendix operate on memory bank 0 and cannot be used for other memory banks.
501
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
Connections
This section shows connections for using the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS E5ZE
RS-232C
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C
Serial Communications
Unit/Board/Unit
RS-232C: D-sub E5ZE LT1181CS or
9-pin female equivalent
RS-232C: D-sub
Signal Pin 9-pin female
name No.
Shield Pin Signal
No. name
FG 1
SG 9 7 SG
SD 2 2 SD TX
RD 3 3 RD RX
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
DSR 7 6 DSR
DTR 8 20 DTR V
Note 1. The maximum communications cable length is 15 m. Use a shielded twisted-pair cable for the cable.
2. Use a 25-pin D-sub Plug (OMRON XM2A-2501).
3. Use XM2S-2511 Hood (OMRON) or an equivalent.
502
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
RS422/485 Connections
• RS-485 2-wire Connections
Pin No. Signal name Abbreviation Signal direction
1 Disabled (Do not connect.) --- ---
2 Disabled (Do not connect.) --- ---
3 Signal ground SG ---
4 Terminal B (+ side) B I/O
5 Terminal A (– side) A I/O
E5ZE 4.7 kΩ
RS-485: D-sub
9-pin female RS-485: Terminals
4.7 kΩ RX
Signal Pin Ter- Signal
name No. minal name
51 kΩ
FG Hood 3 SG
B 2 4 B
TX
A 1 5 A
6.8 V
Shield
E5ZE
RS-485: Terminals
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch Shield Terminating
Ter-
to the 2-wire setting. minal
Signal
name resistance
*2: Turn ON the terminat- 3 SG
240 Ω
5 A
Note Terminal block pins 1 and 2 cannot be connected. If these blocks are used, operation of the E5ZE may
fail.
503
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
SDB 2 1 RDB
4.7 kΩ RX
SDA 1 2 RDA
51 kΩ
8 4 SDB
RDB
TX
RDA 6 5 SDA
2 RDA
4 SDB
5 SDA
Terminating
resistance
240 Ω
504
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
Switch Settings
This section shows the switch settings for using the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
Communications Parameter DIP Switch
Pins 3 and 4: Terminating resistance
Pins 1 and 2: RS-422/RS-485
3 4
DTS-4
1 2
Factory defaults: All OFF
Pins Parameter RS-422 RS-485
3 and 4 Terminating ON
3 4
ON OFF
3 4
resistance
ON ON
OFF
3 4
OFF
3 4
OFF
OFF OFF
1 2
1 2
OFF ON
OFF ON
Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Unit No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F
Factory defaults
Baud Rate DIP Switch
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
1
2
505
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
506
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
507
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
508
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
509
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
510
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
511
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
512
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
513
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
514
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
515
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
516
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
517
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
Read Output Value Change Rate Limit (Sequence No. 118 (Hex
0076))
Reads the output value change rate limits and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Unit No.
518
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
519
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
520
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
Note The read data will be 0000 for all channels for which HB and HS alarms are not enabled and for all chan-
nels for which control is stopped.
521
E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol Appendix H
522
Appendix I
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol
The E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol writes and controls various settings in remote mode for the
Temperature Controller connected via a RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable from the PLC via the Serial Communi-
cations Unit/Board.
Note 1. Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
2. All sequences in this appendix operate on memory bank 0 and cannot be used for other memory
banks.
523
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
Connections
The connections are the same as that for the E5ZE Temperature Controller Read Protocol.
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 1) (Sequence No. 150 (Hex 0096))
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 1 (4 digits).
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Unit No.
+2 Set point
+3 (Undefined) Channel 0
+4 Set point
Channel 1
+5 (Undefined)
~ ~
+16 Set point
Channel 7
+17 (Undefined)
524
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
Write Set Point (Setting Unit 0.1) (Sequence No. 151 (Hex 0097))
Writes the set points using a setting unit of 0.1 (5 digits).
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Unit No.
+2 Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
+3 Set point (leftmost 1 digit) Channel 0
+4 Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Channel 1
+5 Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
~ ~
+16 Set point (rightmost 4 digits)
Channel 7
+17 Set point (leftmost 1 digit)
525
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
526
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
527
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
528
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
529
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
530
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
531
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
532
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
533
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
534
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
535
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
Write Output Value Change Rate Limit (Sequence No. 167 (Hex
00A7))
Writes the output value change rate limits that restrict the rates of change in the control value output.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Unit No.
+2 Output change rate limit Channel 0
+3 Output change rate limit Channel 1
+4 Output change rate limit Channel 2
+5 Output change rate limit Channel 3
+6 Output change rate limit Channel 4
+7 Output change rate limit Channel 5
+8 Output change rate limit Channel 6
+9 Output change rate limit Channel 7
536
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
537
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
538
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
539
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
540
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
541
E5ZE Temperature Controller Write Protocol Appendix I
542
Appendix J
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol
The E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol performs various settings and controls in remote mode for the Tem-
perature Controller connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
543
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
Connections
The connections for using the E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
E5#J
PLC PS
RS-232C
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C
Serial Communications
Unit/Board E5AJ
RS-232C: D-sub RS-232C:
9-pin female Terminal Block
MAX232C or
Signal Pin
name No.
Ter- Signal
minal name
equivalent
FG 1 Shield 25 SG
SG 9 27 SG
SD 2 26 SD TX
RD 3 28 RD RX
RTS 4
CTS 5
DSR 7
DTR 8
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m.
2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable.
544
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
RS-422A/485 Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series) E5#J
PLC PS
RS-422A/485 port
→
RS-422A/485
E5#J
→
RS-422A/485
Up to 32 units can be
connected.
E5#J
→
RS-422A/485
Serial Commu-
nications Board/Unit
RS-422A: D-sub SN751177N or
9-pin female E5AJ Terminating equivalent
RS-422A:
Signal Pin Terminal Block resistance
name No.
Ter- Signal
minal name
Shell
Terminating re-
sistance 240 Ω Terminating resist-
Shield ance (240 Ω) is
E5AJ connected via the
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch RS-422A:
terminator switch.
to the 4-wire setting. Terminal Block
545
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
Shield
Terminating resist-
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch ance (240 Ω) is
to the 2-wire setting. connected via the
terminator switch.
*2: Turn ON the terminat-
ing resistance switch. E5AJ Terminator switch
RS-485:
Terminal Block
Shield Ter- Signal
minal name
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one or a one-to-N configuration. Using a one-to-N configu-
ration, up to 32 units can be connected including the Serial Communications Boards Unit.
2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use shielded twisted-pair cable.
3. Connect terminating resistance to the devices only at both ends of the transmission path.
4. The total terminating resistance at both ends must be at least 100 Ω for RS-422A or 54 Ω for RS-485.
546
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
547
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
548
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
549
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
550
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
551
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
552
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
553
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
554
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
555
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
556
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
557
E5@J Temperature Controller Protocol Appendix J
558
Appendix K
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol
The ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol controls in remote mode and reads various settings from the Controller
connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422A/485 cable.
Note Negative values cannot be written. All values must be set as unsigned BCD.
559
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
Connections
Connections for using the ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series) ES100#
PLC PS
RS-232C
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C
560
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
RS-422A/485 Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series) ES100#
PLC PS
RS-422A/485 port
→
RS-422A/485
ES100#
→
RS-422A/485
Up to 32 units can be
connected.
ES100#
→
RS-422A/485
24 SDA
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch Next
to the 4-wire setting. 25 SDB
16 RDA ES100
*2: Turn ON the terminat-
ing resistance switch. 17 RDB
SDA 1 16
SBA 2 17
FG Hood
Next
ES100
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch
to the 2-wire setting.
*2: Turn ON the terminat-
ing resistance switch.
561
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
Switch Settings
There are two switches located on the board on the left of the Unit. Set SW1 to the interface: RS-422A or RS-
485. Set SW2 to the same setting as SW1 on the terminating Units and to the center on all other Units.
422← • →485
422← • →485
562
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
563
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
564
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
565
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
566
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
567
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
568
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
569
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
570
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
571
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
572
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
573
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
574
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
575
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
576
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
577
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
578
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
579
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
580
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
581
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
582
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
583
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
584
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
585
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
586
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
587
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
588
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
589
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
590
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
591
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
592
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
593
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
594
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
595
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
596
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
Note 1. At transmission, a header code “@” is attached before the data and the FCS and a terminator “*”CR
are attached following the send data.
2. At reception, data excluding the header code “@” at the beginning of the receive data and the FCS
and terminator “*”CR at the end of the data is stored in the receive data storage words.
3. Refer to the manual for the ES100@ for the contents of send data and receive data.
597
ES100@ Digital Controller Protocol Appendix K
598
Appendix L
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol
The K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Intelli-
gent Signal Processor connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422/485 cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol is shown as follows:
Sequence Communications Function Ladder interface Notes
No. sequence name Send word Receive word
allocation allocation
300 (012C) Reset (by unit number) Performs the same processing as Yes No
when an input is received on the
reset terminal.
301 (012D) Reset (continuous units) Performs the same processing as Yes No
when an input is received on the
reset terminal.
302 (012E) Write set value (by unit Writes the set value HH, H, L, or Yes No 1
number) LL.
303 (012F) Write set value HH (con- Writes the set value HH. Yes No 1
tinuous units)
304 (0130) Write set value H (contin- Writes the set value H. Yes No 1
uous units)
305 (0131) Write set value L (contin- Writes the set value L. Yes No 1
uous units)
306 (0132) Write set value LL (con- Writes the set value LL. Yes No 1
tinuous units)
307 (0133) Write set value with bank Writes the set value to a bank Yes No 2
(by unit number) which is not in use (K3TR: HH to
LL, K3TC: O1 to O5).
308 (0134) Write set value HH with Writes the set value HH to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
309 (0135) Write set value H with Writes the set value H to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
310 (0136) Write set value L with Writes the set value L to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
311 (0137) Write set value LL with Writes the set value LL to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
312 (0138) Write set value O5 with Writes the set value O5 to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
313 (0139) Write set value O4 with Writes the set value O4 to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
314 (013A) Write set value O3 with Writes the set value O3 to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
315 (013B) Write set value O2 with Writes the set value O2 to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
316 (013C) Write set value O1 with Writes the set value O1 to a bank Yes No 1
bank (continuous units) which is not in use.
317 (013D) Read set value (by unit Reads the set value HH, H, L, or Yes Yes 1
number) LL.
318 (013E) Read set value HH (con- Reads the set value HH. Yes Yes 1
tinuous units)
599
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
600
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Connections
The connections used for the K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS K3T#
RS-232C
RS-232C port
RS-232C
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one configuration and the maximum cable length is 15 m.
2. Use shielded twisted-pair cable.
601
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
RS-422/485 Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS
RS-422/485
K3T#
RS-422/485
K3T#
RS-422/485
Serial Communications
Board/Unit Intelligent Sig-
RS-422: D-sub nal Processor SN751177N or
9-pin female
RS-422:
equivalent
Signal Pin Terminal block
220 ΩTerminal block SW
Name No.
Termi- Signal
FG Hood nal. Name
RDA 6 9 SDA
RDB 8 5 SDB
SDA 1 6 RDA
SDB 2 1 RDB
3 SG
220 Ω
6.8 V
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch Shield
to the 4-wire setting.
Terminating resistance (approx. 220 Ω) is
*2: Turn ON the terminat- connected via the terminal block switch.
ing resistance switch.
602
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Shield
Intelligent Signal Processor
Unit designated as terminator.
*1: Set the 2-/4-wire switch
to the 2-wire setting. RS-485:
Terminal block
*2: Turn ON the terminat- Termi- Signal
ing resistance switch. nal. Name
220 Ω Terminal block SW ON
18
19
The terminal block switch is turned ON.
Shield
Note 1. The connection configuration is a one-to-one or a 1-to-N configuration. For 1-to-N connections, up to
32 units including the Serial Communications Boards/Units can be connected.
2. The maximum cable length is 500 m. Use shielded twisted-pair cables (AWG28i or greater).
3. Connect terminating resistance at both ends of the transmission path.
4. Turn the terminal block switch ON at the terminators.
5. Turn the terminal block switches OFF for units that are not terminators.
603
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
604
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Write Set Value (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 302 (Hex 012E))
This sequence writes each set value (HH, H, L, LL).
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 Number of units
+2 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
+3 Operand
+4 Set value
+5 (Undefined) Set value
~ ~
+122 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
+123 Operand
+124 Set value
+125 (Undefined) Set value
•
•
•
+124 to Set value Same as above
+125 (5 digits BCD)
605
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
•
•
•
+64 to Set value Same as above
+65 (5 digits BCD)
Write Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 307
(Hex 0133))
This sequence writes set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC:O1 to O5).
606
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
•
•
•
+125 to Set value Same as above
+126 (5 digits BCD)
607
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
•
•
•
+96 to Set value Same as above
+97 (5 digits BCD)
608
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Read Set Value (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 317 (Hex 013D))
Reads set value HH, H, L, or LL.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 Number of units
+2 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
+3 Operand
~ ~
+64 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
+65 Operand
609
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
•
•
•
+95 to Set value Same as above
+96 (5 digits BCD)
610
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Read Set Value with Bank (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 322
(Hex 0142))
Reads the set value of a bank which is not in use (K3TR: HH to LL, K3TC:01 to 05) and stores the results in the
specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Number of units
+2 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
+3 (Undefined) Bank No.
+4 Operand
~ ~
+95 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
+96 (Undefined) Bank No.
+97 Operand
611
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
•
•
•
+63 to Set value Same as above
+64 (5 digits BCD)
612
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
613
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
614
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Read Display Value (PV) (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 335
(Hex 014F))
Reads the display value (PV) and stores the results in the specified words.
615
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
616
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
617
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
Model Data Read (by Unit Number) (Sequence No. 337 (Hex
0151))
Reads model data and stores the results in the specified words.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 Number of units
+2 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
~ ~
+26 (Undefined) Relevant unit No.
618
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
619
K3T@ Intelligent Signal Processor Protocol Appendix L
620
Appendix M
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol
The V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Bar Code
Reader connected the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol is shown below.
Sequence Communications Function Ladder interface
No. sequence name Send word Receive word
allocation allocation
350 (015E) BCR read start Instructs the Reader to start a BCR read. No No
351 (015F) BCR read stop Instructs the Reader to stop a BCR read. No No
352 (0160) Data read Data read by the Reader is received and No Yes
saved in the receive words.
353 (0161) Complete data read Instructs the Reader to start a read. After No Yes
the data read by the Reader is received and
saved to the receive words, reading is
stopped.
354 (0162) BCR function write Writes the operation mode and read func- Yes No
(V500) tions.
355 (0163) BCR function read Reads the operation mode and read func- No Yes
(V500) tions.
356 (0164) Log data output request Requests output of log data sent to host. Yes Yes
(V500)
357 (0165) Preset data set (V500) Writes preset data. Yes No
358 (0166) BCR connection confir- Confirms if the Reader is correctly set. No No
mation (V500)
359 (0167) Log data clear (V500) Clear log data. No No
360 (0168) Continuous data read Performs the following operations repeat- No Yes
(scan) (V500) edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the scan method.
361 (0169) Continuous data read Performs the following operations repeat- No Yes
(interrupt) (V500) edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the interrupt method (interrupt
No.100).
362 (016A) BCR initialize Clears the log, confirms BCR connection, Yes No
and sets BCRs.
363 (016B) Continuous data read Performs the following operations repeat- No Yes
(scan) (V520) edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the scan method.
364 (016C) Continuous data read Performing the following operations repeat- No Yes
(interrupt) (V520) edly: starts reading, receives data read by
the Reader, saves the data to the receive
words by the interrupt method (interrupt
No.100).
365 (016D) General-purpose com- Used to send data of a specified data Yes No
mand 1 length, and receive only ACK as the receive
data.
366 (016E) General-purpose com- Used to send data of a specified data Yes Yes
mand 2 length, and receive ACK together with the
return of other receive data. The frame for-
mat of the receive data, however, has to
contain STX and ETX.
621
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
Connections
The connections for using the V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol are shown below.
V500 Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit 100 VAC
(CS/CJ Series) V520-R12#
PLC PS Reader
RS-232C port V500-C11
ID Controller
V509-W040
Reader Cable
622
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
V520 Connections
V520-R121
RS-232C port
V509-W011
Reader Cable
System Setting
Shown below are the system settings of the V500-C11 and V520-R121 when this protocol is used.
Note The portions enclosed by in boxes are used for this protocol.
V500-C11
• BCR Functions
Read trigger
"READ SIGNAL INPUT", "ONLINE READ COMMAND"
• Host Interface
Prefix
NONE, "STX"
Suffix
"ETX" , "CR "
V520-R121
Start code
NONE, "STX"
Stop code
"ETX" , "CR"
623
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
Note The reception wait time is not set for this sequence.
624
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
Note Selecting the values marked with asterisks is required for this protocol.
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
None.
625
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
626
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
Log Data Output Request (V500) (Sequence No. 356 (Hex 0164))
This sequence requests output of the log data sent to host.
Send Data Word Allocation (3rd Operand of PMCR(260))
First word of +0 Number of send data words
send data
+1 (Undefined) Number of units
627
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
~ ~
+(18N+2) (Undefined) Preset data No.
+(18N+3) (Undefined) Number of units
+(18N+4) Preset data
+(18N+5) Preset data
~ ~
+(18N+18) Preset data
+(18N+19) Preset data
628
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
629
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
630
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
Note Shown below is the receive data frame format. The reception data without ACK, STX, and ETX is stored.
STX ETX
ACK
631
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader Protocol Appendix M
632
Appendix N
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol
The 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Laser Micrometer
connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol is shown below.
Sequence Communications sequence Function Ladder interface Notes
No. name Send word Receive
allocation word allo-
cation
400 (0190) 3Z4L clear Resets errors, data, analog output, No No
decision result and places the Laser
Micrometer into standby.
401 (0191) Memory switch set Sets memory switches and the area Yes No
for the work position LED.
402 (0192) mm unit set Sets the display unit to mm. No No
403 (0193) E unit set Sets the display unit to E. No No
404 (0194) Calibration set Calibrates the Laser Micrometer. Yes No
Calibration setting release.
405 (0195) Calibration release Releases the calibration of the Laser No No
Micrometer.
406 (0196) Program number set Switches the program number to a Yes No
(3000-series) specified number.
407 (0197) Measurement condition set Sets measurement conditions. Yes No
(3000-series)
408 (0198) Measurement condition Releases measurement conditions Yes No
release (3000-series) that have been set.
409 (0199) Measurement condition list Requests the measurement condi- No Yes
request (3000-series) tions that have been set and other
settings.
410 (019A) Single run measurement start When the sample measurement con- No Yes
(3000-series) dition is from 1 to 999, performs a sin-
gle run measurement and requests
the measurement results.
411 (019B) Zero run measurement start If the sample measurement condition No No
(3000-series) is zero, starts a zero run measure-
ment.
412 (019C) Continuous measurement start Starts a continuous measurement. No Yes
(scan) (3000-series) The scan notification method is used
for receive data.
413 (019D) Continuous measurement start Starts a continuous measurement. No Yes 2
(interrupt) (3000-series) The interrupt notification method is
used for receive data.
Measurement termination (3000-
series)
414 (019E) Measurement termination Terminates a continuous measure- No No*1
(3000-series) ment.
415 (019F) Data request (3000-series) Requests display data in the idle No Yes
measurement status or the latch data
generated by the measurement com-
mand.
633
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
634
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
635
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Connections
The connections for the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connection
Sensor
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
Signal cable
(CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS
RS-232C
RS-232C Port Controller
FG 1 1 FG
SD 2 2 TXD
RD 3 3 RXD
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
DSR 7 6 DSR
DTR 8 7 SG
SG 9 20 DTR
• DIP Switch 2
No. Setting Status
1 Selection for measure- ON/OFF Set these settings according
ment section to the sensor connected.
2 ON/OFF
3 ON/OFF
4 ON/OFF
5 Setting of minimum read ON/OFF Set these settings for
value 4 digits in the decimal por-
6 ON/OFF
tion.
7 Setting of transparent ON/OFF
body measurement func-
tion
8 Setting of simultaneous ON/OFF
measurement function
636
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
• DIP Switch 3
No. Setting Status
1 Setting of measurement ON/OFF
function by 2 measure-
2 ment instruments ON/OFF
3 ON/OFF
4 ON/OFF
5 Error data exclusion func- ON/OFF This protocol does not sup-
tion port the error data exclusion
6 Multistep selection func- ON/OFF function
tion
3Z4L-4000 Series
• DIP Switch 1
No. Setting Status
1 Baud rate ON/OFF
2 ON/OFF
3 Hand-shake procedure ON/OFF
4 Delimiter ON/OFF
5 ON/OFF
6 RS-232C interface use ON/OFF
selection
7 ON/OFF
8 ON/OFF
• DIP Switch 2
No. Setting Status
1 Selection for measure- ON/OFF Set these settings according
ment section to the sensor connected.
2 ON/OFF
3 ON/OFF
4 ON/OFF
5 Setting of minimum read ON/OFF Set these settings for
value 4 digits in the decimal por-
6 ON/OFF
tion.
7 Display unit ON/OFF
8 External command setting ON/OFF
637
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Turn OFF
Delimiter Setting
Delimiter CR+LF LF
CR
Pin
Handshaking
ON: Control (recognize DRT input)
OFF: 3-wire method (non-protocol)
Baud Rate
Baud rate
1200 2400 4800 9600
Pin
638
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
3Z4L-3000 Series
The delimiter control code does not need to be set on the DIP switch for the 3Z4L-3000 Series. Set the delim-
iter control codes in the sequence to CR+LF for the send code and to CR or CR+LF for the receive code. See
the settings in the following diagram.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Turn OFF
Handshaking
ON: Control (recognize DRT input)
OFF: 3-wire method (non-protocol)
Baud Rate
Baud rate
1200 2400 4800 9600
Pin
Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON
The High-speed 3Z4L-3000-series Meters must have the delimiter control codes set using the memory
switches. Set both the send and receive codes to CR+LF.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the 3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol for the 5000 and 6000 Series is shown below.
Sequence Communications sequence name Operation
No. 5000 Series 6000 Series
400 (0190) 3Z4L clear Yes Yes
401 (0191) Memory switch set No*1 No*1
402 (0192) mm unit set Yes Yes
403 (0193) E unit set Yes Yes
404 (0194) Calibration set No No
405 (0195) Calibration release Yes Yes
406 (0196) Program number set (3000-series) No*1 Yes
407 (0197) Measurement condition set (3000-series) No No
408 (0198) Measurement condition release (3000-series) No No
409 (0199) Measurement condition list request (3000-series) No No
410 (019A) Single run measurement start (3000-series) No Yes
411 (019B) Zero run measurement start (3000-series) Yes Yes
412 (019C) Continuous measurement start (scan) (3000-series) No Yes
413 (019D) Continuous measurement start (interrupt) (3000-series) No Yes
414 (019E) Measurement termination (3000-series) No Yes
415 (019F) Data request (3000-series) No Yes
639
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Note 1. *Normal responses will be returned for these sequences for 5000-series and 6000-series Laser Mi-
crometers, but no processing will be performed.
2. *This sequence will be processed the same as sequence No. 425 AVG move (H) times set for 5000-
series Laser Micrometers.
3. *Memory switch settings will be ignored for these sequences for 5000-series and 6000-series Laser
Micrometers.
4. *This sequence will be processed the same as sequence No. 411 Zero run measurement start for
5000-series Laser Micrometers.
640
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
641
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Note 1. Use sequences No. 446 (High calibration set) and No. 447 (Low calibration set) to calibrate the Laser
Micrometer. If this sequence (No. 404) is used, both the high and low calibration gauges must be set,
and the high calibration and low calibration gauges cannot be exchanged.
2. The HC gauge dimension and LC gauge dimension must be set with 3 digits for the integer portion
and 4 digits for the decimal portion.
Receive Data Word Allocation (4th Operand of PMCR(260))
None.
642
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
643
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
644
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
645
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
646
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
647
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
648
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Note This sequence cannot be used to request the lower limit (EL), error upper limit (EH), error exclusion
counter (CNT) of the error data exclusion function (centerless grinder function).
649
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
650
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
651
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
652
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Note The number of digits of the Decimal portion is fixed to 4 digits. If a deviation calculation results in a value
with 5 decimal places, it will be stored with one digit overflowing into the integer portion.
Examples: The value -0.1234 is stored as follows:
Area of decimal portion: 1234; Area of integer portion: 0000; Sign area: F000
653
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
654
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
655
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
656
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
+8 Sign (Undefined)
657
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
Note This sequence cannot be used when DIP switch SW3, pin 5 of the Laser Micrometer is not turned ON.
658
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
+5 Sign (Undefined)
+6 Decimal portion
+7 (Undefined) Integer portion Upper limit value (LH)
+8 Sign (Undefined)
+9 Decimal portion
+10 (Undefined) Integer portion Reference value (REF)
659
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
660
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
+8 Sign (Undefined)
+9 Decimal portion
(Undefined) Integer portion Reference value (REF)
+10
+11 Sign (Undefined)
+12 (Undefined) Analog output scale number (SCL)
+13
+14 Forced zero number (ZERO+)
+15 (Undefined)
+16 (Undefined) Data output condition (PR)
+17 (Undefined) Data output timer (BCD 3 digits) (PRT)
+18 (Undefined) Number of seconds for latch timer (RLT)
661
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
Note This sequence can be used for the 3Z4L-4000 Series only when pin 8 on DIP switch SW2 is turned ON.
+4 Sign (Undefined)
+5 Decimal portion
+6 (Undefined) Integer portion Deviation value
+7 Sign (Undefined)
662
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
663
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
664
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
•
•
+248 Send data
+249 Send data CR
665
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
•
•
+126 Receive data
+249 Receive data
666
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
667
3Z4L Laser Micrometer Protocol Appendix N
668
Appendix O
Visual Inspection System Protocol
The Visual Inspection System Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the Visual Recog-
nition Device connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the Visual Inspection System Protocol is shown below.
Sequence Communications Function Ladder interface Notes
No. sequence name Send word Receive word
allocation allocation
450 (01C2) Measurement execu- Carries out one measurement one and No Yes
tion (F200) stores the measurement results in the
specified words.
451 (01C3) Continuous measure- Carries out continuously setting the No Yes
ment execution (scan) F200 and storing the measurement
(F200) results in the specified words.
452 (01C4) Continuous measure- Carries out continuously setting the No Yes 3
ment execution (inter- F200 and storing the measurement
rupt) (F200) results in the specified words.
453 (01C5) Reference object regis- Performs reference position registration No No
tration (group) (F200) and evaluation criterion registration at
the same time.
454 (01C6) Reference object regis- Registers the reference position for mea- No No
tration (reference posi- suring the amount of position displace-
tion) (F200) ment when a position displacement
compensation is used.
455 (01C7) Reference object regis- Registers the reference value to discrim- No No
tration (evaluation crite- inate the output format.
rion) (F200)
456 (01C8) Evaluation condition Changes the upper and lower limit val- Yes No
change (F200) ues of the evaluation condition of the
designated output No.
457 (01C9) Arbitrary measurement Stores the measurement values of arbi- Yes Yes
value acquisition (F200) trary measurement item regardless of
output format in the specified words.
460 (01CC) Measurement execu- Carries out one measurement and No Yes
tion (F300) stores the measurement results in the
specified words.
461 (01CD) Continuous measure- Carries out continuously setting the No Yes
ment execution (scan) F300 and storing the measurement
(F300) results in the specified words.
462 (01CE) Continuous measure- Carries out continuously setting the No Yes 3
ment execution (inter- F300 and storing the measurement
rupt) (F300) results in the specified words.
463 (01CF) Reference object regis- Performs a measurement for the input No No
tration command 1 exe- image and updates the reference object
cution (F300) data of the full window.
464 (01D0) Reference object regis- Performs a measurement for the input Yes No
tration command 2 exe- image and updates the reference object
cution (F300) data of the full window
465 (01D1) Illumination fluctuation Executes an illumination fluctuation fol- No No
follow execution (F300) low.
470 (01D6) Measurement execu- Carries out one measurement and No Yes
tion and positioning stores the measurement results in the
(F350) specified words.
669
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
670
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
Connections
The connections for using the Visual Inspection System Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series) F200/300/350
PLC PS
RS-232C
RS-232C port
→
RS-232C Unit
SD (TXD) 2 2 SD (TXD)
RD (RXD) 3 3 RD (RXD)
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
DSR 7 6 DSR
SG 9 7 SG
DTR 8 8 CD (DCD)
FG 1 20 DTR
SD (TXD) 2 2 SD (TXD)
RD (RXD) 3 3 RD (RXD)
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
DSR 7 6 DSR
SG 9 7 SG
DTR 8 8 CD (DCD)
FG 1 20 DTR
671
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
672
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
673
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
674
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
+5 Sign (Undefined)
+6 (Undefined) Decimal portion
+7
Integer portion Lower limit value
+8 (Undefined)
+9 Sign (Undefined)
675
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
676
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than –999999.9.
2. The number of measurement items is up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
3. The ranges of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting: –2147483.648 to 2147483.648
For calibration ON setting: –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
677
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
678
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than –999999.9.
2. The number of measurement items are up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
3. The range of measurement values are as follows:
For calibration OFF setting: –2147483.648 to 2147483.648
For calibration ON setting: –9999999.999 to 9999999.999
4. The priority of measurement items being output are as follows:
1 Area
2 Center of gravity X
3 Center of gravity Y
4 Main axis angle
5 Edge angle
6 Center X
7 Center Y
8 Inclination
9 Intersecting point X
10 Intersecting point Y
679
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
Note 1. Exponential expressions are used for numbers larger than 9999999.999 and smaller than –999999.9.
2. The number of measurement items is up to 5, but only one window number can be read.
680
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
681
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
+3 Decimal portion
Integer portion Y displacement
+4 Sign
+5 Decimal portion
Correlation value
+6 Sign 0 Integer portion
682
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
1500 + 25 x unit number +9, bit 14 for Serial Communications Units. The flags for port 2 are CIO
1919114 for the Serial Communications Board and CIO 1500 + 25 x unit number +19, bit 14 for Serial
Communications Units.
4. Data to be output is within the range 999.999 (upper limit) to –999.999 (lower limit).
5. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
6. Turn the Abort Bit ON and then OFF to end this sequence.
683
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
684
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
685
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
686
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
687
Visual Inspection System Protocol Appendix O
688
Appendix P
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol
The V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely the ID Controller
Connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C or RS-422 cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol is shown below.
Sequence Communications Function Ladder interface
No. sequence name Send word Receive word
allocation allocation
500 (01F4) Read (ASCII/1) Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
from the Carrier is 1.
501 (01F5) Read (ASCII/2) Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
from the Carrier is 2.
502 (01F6) Read (ASCII/4) Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
be read from the Carrier is 4.
503 (01F7) Read (ASCII/8) Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
be read from the Carrier is 8.
504 (01F8) Read (Hex/1) Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
from the Carrier is 1.
505 (01F9) Read (Hex/2) Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
from the Carrier is 2.
506 (01FA) Read (Hex/4) Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
be read from the Carrier is 4.
507 (01FB) Read (Hex/8) Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
be read from the Carrier is 8.
508 (01FC) Auto-read (ASCII/1) Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
from the Carrier is 1.
509 (01FD) Auto-read (Hex/1) Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
from the Carrier is 1.
510 (01FE) Polling Auto-read Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes No
(ASCII) from the Carrier is from 1 to 8.
511 (01FF) Polling Auto-read Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
Subcommand from the Carrier is 2.
(ASCII/2)
512 (0200) Polling Auto-read Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
Subcommand be read from the Carrier is 4.
(ASCII/4)
513 (0201) Polling Auto-read Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
Subcommand be read from the Carrier is 8.
(ASCII/8)
514 (0202) Polling Auto-read Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes No
(Hex) from the Carrier is from 1 to 8.
515 (0203) Polling Auto-read Used when the number of Heads to be read Yes Yes
Subcommand (Hex/2) from the Carrier is 2.
516 (0204) Polling Auto-read Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
Subcommand (Hex/4) be read from the Carrier is 4.
517 (0205) Polling Auto-read Used when the maximum number of Heads to Yes Yes
Subcommand (Hex/8) be read from the Carrier is 8.
518 (0206) Write (ASCII/1) Used when the number of Heads to be written Yes No
to the Carrier is 1.
689
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
690
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Connections
Connections when using the V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol are shown below.
RS-232C Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
PLC PS Head Data Carrier
RS-232C
RS-232C port ID Controller
RS-232C
Signal Signal
Pin No. Pin No.
FG 1 1 GR
SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD
RTS 4 4 RTS
CTS 5 5 CTS
SG 9 9 SG
Shield
691
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Shield
RS-422 Connections
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
Head Data Carrier
PLC PS
RS-422
Head Data Carrier
ID Controller
RS-422
Shield
Note 1. Ground the cable shield at either the ID Controller or the Serial Communications Unit/Board to pre-
vent malfunction.
2. Turn ON the pin 6 on DIP switch SW6 to set the host communications procedure to the 1-to-N proce-
dure for 1-to-N connections.
692
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• SW7 Setting
This setting is only valid if the EEPROM-type (batteryless-
type) Data Carrier (DC) is accessed. The setting of SW7 does
not work with the SRAM-type (battery-type) DC. SW7 must
be set to OFF when the V620 is used.
693
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
DIP Switch 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Synchronous condition
OFF (LL level)
ON (HL level)
Trailing edge
Leading edge
694
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
• SW8: Receive Side Terminating Resistance Setting (Valid Only for the V600-CA2A)
Connected (ID Controller send side)
Not connected
• SW7: Receive Side Terminating Resistance Setting (Valid Only for the V600-CA2A)
Connected (ID Controller receive side)
Not connected
• ID Controller Unit Number Setting (Valid Only for the 1-to-N Protocol)
Unit No.
695
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the
receive data words, as shown in the following diagram.
Data Carrier
Receive data storage words
+0 +0
Example for 5 bytes +1
+1
+2 +2
+3
+4
696
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the
receive data words.
697
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+73 Read data
~ ~ 4 CH
+96 Read data
698
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the
receive data words.
699
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+71 Read data
~ ~ CH 8
+80 Read data
Note Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the
receive data words.
700
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words, as shown in the following diagram.
Data Carrier
Receive data storage words
+0 +0
Example for 6 bytes
+1 +1
+2
701
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+60 Not used
+61 Read data
~ ~ CH 2
+90 Read data
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
+16 CH 4
Leading address No.
+17 (Undefined) Read bytes
702
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+73 Read data
~ ~ CH 4
+84 Read data
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is received beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
703
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
704
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
Note Data for Data Carriers designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the
receive data words.
705
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
706
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 510 before executing Sequence No. 511.
2. Data from Data Carriers designated for ASCII is stored beginning with the smallest offset from the
receive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
707
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
708
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
2. Data from Data Carrier designated for hexadecimal is stored beginning with the largest offset from
the receive data words.
3. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
709
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
Max
+249 Write data
Data Carrier
Receive data storage words
+0 +0
Example for 5 bytes
+1 +1
+2 +2
+3
+4
710
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
711
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+86 (Undefined) Unit No.
+87 (Undefined) Head CH No.
712
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+100 (Undefined) Unit No.
+101 (Undefined) Head CH No.
713
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
Max +35 (Undefined) Write data
714
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
~ ~
+65 (Not used)
+66 (Undefined) Unit No.
+67 (Undefined) Head CH No.
715
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
716
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note 1. Write data designated for hexadecimal is sent beginning with the largest offset from the send data
words.
2. Always set an even number of digits for the write data.
~ ~
+15 Not used
+16 (Undefined) Unit No.
+17 (Undefined) Head CH No.
717
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
718
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 528 before executing Sequence No. 529.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
719
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
Note 1. Execute Sequence No. 532 before executing Sequence No. 533.
2. Retry processing is not performed for this sequence.
720
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
721
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
722
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
723
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
724
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
725
V600/V620 ID Controller Protocol Appendix P
726
Appendix Q
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol
The Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is used to make various settings or control remotely a Hayes
modem connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board via RS-232C cable.
Protocol Configuration
The configuration of the Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is shown below.
Sequence Communications Function Ladder interface
No. sequence name Send word Receive word
allocation allocation
550 (0226) Initialize modem Initializes the modem connected to the Yes No
(general-purpose) Serial Communications Unit/Board. The ini-
tialization command is set in the words
specified for the second operand of
PMCR(260).
560 (0230) Initialize modem Initializes certain OMRON Modems. No No
570 (023A) (specialized)
580 (0244)
561 (0231) Dial Dials from the modem connected to the Yes No
571 (023B) Serial Communications Unit/Board. AT
581 (0245) commands and telephone numbers are set
set in the words specified for the 3rd oper-
and of PMCR(260). This sequence can be
used only for certain OMRON modems.
552 (0228) Password After the line is connected, the password Yes No
sent from the other exchange is verified to
confirm that the line is connected to the
desired exchange. The normal value of a
password is set in the words specified for
the 3rd operand of PMCR(260).
553 (0229) Data send/receive Sends arbitrary data to the exchange which Yes Yes
(general purpose the line is connected. Send data is set in the
sequence) words specified for the 2nd operand of
PMCR(260). Receive data is stored in the
words specified for the fourth operand of
PMCR(260).
554 (022A) Escape Shifts the modem to escape mode (the con- No No
dition in which command input is available
during data communications). The escape
code is fixed to “+++”
555 (022B) Hang up After shifting to escape mode, the line is No No
disconnected.
562 (0232) Initialize and dial Executes continuously from initialization to Yes*1 No
572 (023C) dialling operations for certain OMRON
582 (0246) Modems.
590 (024E) Escape to hang up Executes continuously from shifting to the No No
escape mode to hanging up.
Note 1. Refer to sequences No. 561, No. 571, and No. 581 for dialing operations.
2. Ladder Interface Settings
YES: User settings are required for the 3rd and 4th operands of PMCR(260).
NO: Send word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 3rd operand (S).
Receive word allocation: Set the constant 0000 for the 4th operand (D).
3. The hexadecimal equivalents of sequences numbers are given in parentheses.
727
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
Connections
The connections when using the Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol is shown below.
RS-232C Connection
Serial Communications Board
(CS Series only)
Serial Communications Unit
(CS/CJ Series)
ST2
RT
DTR
CI
ST1
Compatible Modems
Although most of the sequences in this protocol can be used regardless of modem, the sequences Initialize
Modem (specialized) and Dial sequences can be used only for the following Modems:
• MD24FB10V (OMRON Modem)
• MD144FB5V (OMRON Intelligent Modem)
• ME1414BIII, ME2814BII (OMRON FAX/DATA Modem)
For other modems, create a modem initialization sequence using the general-purpose Initialize Modem
sequence and dial using the Data Communications Sequence (Sequence No. 553).
728
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
Modem Settings
When this protocol is used, it is required that the modem connected to the Serial Communications Unit/Board
be initialized to the following conditions:
Command echo No
Result code display format Numeric format
Speed display, busy/dialling tone detection at connec- Baud rate display enabled, busy and dialling tone
tion detection enabled.
Error correction data compression display Error correction/data compression display enabled
MNP setting Error correction provided (auto-reliable mode)
MNP class setting MNP class 4
V.42 compression, Error correction Not enabled
Flow control between terminal modems Not enabled
ER signal control Always ON
Escape code +
Note 1. It is recommended that, in addition to the above settings, the abort timer should be set so that com-
munications are cut off if a communications error happened due to incidents such as cable discon-
nection between the Serial Communications Unit/Board and modem. The abort timer is set to 10
minutes for the modem initialization (specialized) (Sequences No. 560, No. 570, No. 580: Initialize
Modem (Specialized)). Refer to modem’s manual for further information about abort timers.
2. The data format of the modem (baud rate, data length, parity, stop bit) is set by AT commands issued
from a device connected to the modem. Its settings should conform to communications conditions of
the device which issues AT commands. Therefore when communications are made between the mo-
dem and Serial Communications Unit/Board, it is required that communications conditions should be
set by issuing AT commands from the Serial Communications Unit/Board.
3. Modem settings become invalid if the power supply is turned off and must be set again. However, a
memory backup function can be used to protect settings so that even after the power supply to the
modem is turned off, it can communicate with the previous setting conditions.
For Initialize Modem (specialized), the modem initialization command is built in as message data. However, for
Initialize Modem (general-purpose), the command must be specified in the send data for PMCR(260).
OPR 1 (Communications port settings)
OPR 2 #0226 (Sequence No. 550)
OPR 3 Address for first word containing initialization command character
string S
OPR 4 None (Set #0000)
S+0 Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of data 4 digits Hex
S+1 Number of bytes for send data (initialization command) 4 digits Hex
S+2 Send data (initialization command) ASCII
: (Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
S+n
0012 0020
A T E 0 V 0 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 %C 0 * C 0 \ X 1 & M 0 S 2 6 = 1 0
Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes)
Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
Note Turn ON pin 4 of DIP switches SW3 on for this Modem (ER signal always ON).
729
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
0017 0029
A T E 0 V 0 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 %C 0 * C 0 \ Q 0 &M 0 & D 0 %B 9 6 0 0 S 2 6 = 1 0
ME1414BIII/ME2814BII (OMRON)
The following command is set in the words specified by the second operand of PMCR(260).
AT\J1B8E0V0S0=1X4\V2\N3&M0%C0&D0&E0\X1S26=10
0018 002C
A T \ J 1 B 8 E 0 V 0 S 0 = 1 X 4 \ V 2 \ N 3 & M 0 %C 0 & D 0 & E 0 \ X 1 S 2 6 = 1 0
Character string length of modem initialization command (bytes)
Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
Dialling (Sequences No. 561 (Hex 0231), No. 571 (Hex 023B), and
No. 581 (Hex 0245))
To dial a telephone numbers for the OMRON ME1414BIII/ME2814BII Modems using sequences No. 561, 571,
581, set the dialling command and telephone number in the words specified by the 3rd operand of PMCR(260).
However, for other Modems, make the following settings for the Data Communications sequence.
This is an example of telephone number settings for the above mentioned 4 OMRON Modems.
Operand and Send Data Word Settings of PMCR(260)
OPR 2 MD24FB10V #0231
MD144FB5V #023B
ME1414BIII/ME2814BII #0245
OPR 3 First address S of send data (dialling operation)
OPR 4 None (Set #0000)
S+0 Number of words from address set for operand 2 to end of data 4 digits Hex
S+1 Number of bytes of send data (dialling operation) 4 digits Hex
S+2 Send data (dialling operation) ASCII
: (Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
S+n
Setting Example
If telephone number is 03-0123-4567
000A 0010 4154 4454 3033 2D30 3132 332D 3435 3637
AT DT 03 –0 12 3– 45 67
Character string length of dialling operation sent to modem (bytes)
Code length of PMCR(260) when it is used (words)
Note 1. This example uses a tone line. Change ATDT to ATDP for pulse lines.
2. Fill the telephone number to the left in the words if the character string length of the dialling operation
is an odd number of bytes.
730
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
S+0 Number of words from address set for operand 3 to end of data 4 digits Hex
S+1 Number of bytes of comparison data (normal value of pass- 4 digits Hex
word)
S+2 Comparison value (password normal value) ASCII
: (Fill data to left for odd numbers of bytes)
S+n
Setting Example
When password is OMRON-CO.
731
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
PLC
Personal computer
(remote exchange)
Password verification
(starting #552)
(Retry up to 3 times)
Receiving
password
Verifying
password
732
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
Setting Example
When send data is THIS IS SAMPLE.
A maximum of 200 bytes (including the CR) can be received. When the received data is RETURN OK, the con-
tent stored in the receive words is as follows:
Note An error will occur is the reception data is not received within 90 seconds after the data is sent.
Communication Errors
Three result codes are monitored after an AT command is sent to the modem. When a result code is returned,
it will be checked. If the code is not the normal result code (“OK”, “CONNECT 9600/REL4”, “CONNECT 2400/
REL4”, in words), after a fixed time of waiting to send, the following retry processing will be repeated 2 times to
send the AT command again and waiting for another result code.
The receive monitoring time and send wait time for each sequence are shown below.
Sequence Sequence name Receive monitoring Send wait time for
No. time retries
550 (0226) Initialize modem (general-purpose) 10 s 1s
560 (0230) Initialize modem (specialized) 10 s 1s
570 (023A)
580 (0244)
561 (0231) Dial 90 s 90 s
571 (023B)
581 (0245)
552 (0228) Password None 3s
553 (0229) Data send/receive (general-purpose) 90 s None
554 (022A) Escape 10 s 1.5 s (after first try)
555 (022B) Hang up 10 s 1.5 s (after first try)
562 (0232) Initialize and dial 90s Initializing: 1 s
572 (023C) Dialling: 90 s
582 (0246)
590 (024E) Escape and hang up 10 s 1.5 s (after first try)
733
Hayes Modem AT Command Protocol Appendix Q
734
Appendix R
Changing Communications Port Settings
Using STUP(237)
The STUP(237) instruction can be used to change the serial communications mode, communications specifi-
cations, and other settings for each port of the Serial Communications Board/Unit during CPU Unit operation.
When the STUP(237) instruction is executed, the CPU Unit changes the contents of the relevant DM Area in
the Unit, then automatically turns ON the Port Settings Change Bit (words A620 to A635) in the Auxiliary Area.
A620 + unit number
Port 1 Port Settings Change Bit: Bit 1
Port 2 Port Settings Change Bit: Bit 2
735
Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237) Appendix R
When the cyclic service finishes changing the communications port settings in the Serial Communications
Board or Unit, the Board or Unit automatically restarts the port and turns OFF the Port Settings Change Bit.
Data Contents
Area C S
CIO Area 0000 to 6143 0000 to 6134
Work Area W000 to W511 W000 to W502
Holding Area H000 to H511 H000 to H502
Auxiliary Area A000 to A959 A000 to A950
Timer Area T0000 to T4095 T0000 to T4086
Counter Area C0000 to C4095 C0000 to C4086
Data Memory (DM) Area D00000 to D32767 D00000 to D32758
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area E00000 to D32767 E00000 to E32758
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area En_00000 to En_32767 (n = 0 to C) En_00000 to En_32758 (n = 0 to C)
(including bank specification)
Indirect DM/EM address, Binary @D00000 to @D32767, @E00000 to @E32767, @En_00000 to @En_32767
Indirect DM/EM address, BCD *D00000 to *D32767, *E00000 to *E32767, *En_00000 to *En_32767
Constants See Control Data (C). #0000 to FFFF (Binary data)
Data Registers DR0 to DR15 ---
Index Registers, Direct ---
Index Registers, Indirect ,IR0 to ,IR15
–2048 to +2047 ,IR0 to –2048 to +2047,IR15
DR0 to DR15 ,IR0 to IR15
,IR0+(++) to ,IR15+(++)
,–(– –)IR0 to ,–(– –)IR15
Ladder Program
000000
@STUP
#02E1
D00200
736
Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237) Appendix R
Settings
S: D00200 0500
Port setting: Defaults
S+1: D00201 0000 Protocol mode: 1 hex (Host Link)
S+2: D00202 0000 Baud rate: Default (9,600 bps)
S+3: D00203 0000 Transmission delay time: 0 ms
: CTS control: None
Unit number: 00
S+9:
Transmit
D32010 0500 Settings for port 2 of Serial Communications Board
D32011 0000 (D32010 to D32019)
D32012 0000
D32013 0000
D32019
Note STUP(237) transfers 10 words of data from the DM Area Setup Area. When using the Modbus-RTU
slave mode, the Setup Area is expanded. Before executing STUP(237), use MOV(021) or other instruc-
tions to write the Modbus-RTU settings directly to the DM Area Setup Area for the Serial Communica-
tions Board/Unit. Doing so will allow STUP(237) to transfer all of the expanded DM Area Setup Area to
the Serial Communications Board/Unit.
Setup in DM Area
2) Execute STUP(237).
Port 1 Settings
Port 1
setting data
Port 2 Settings
Serial
Communications Port 1
Board/Unit Port 1 Settings setting data
for Modbus- for Modbus-RTU
RTU Slave slave
3) STUP(237)
writes the settings Port 1 Settings
to the Board/Unit. for Modbus-
RTU Slave 1) Move setting data using
MOV(021) or other instruction.
737
Changing Communications Port Settings Using STUP(237) Appendix R
738
Index
Numerics C
1 1 NT Link, 4, 6 C200H Communications Boards, 35, 138, 297
1 N NT Link, 3, 5, 7, 10 C200H Host Link Units, 35
Auxiliary Area allocations, 268 C200HX/HG/HE Communications Board
CIO Area allocations, 269 changes in communications specifications, 138, 297
commands, 264 cables
connecting Programmable Terminals, 113 preparation, 118
connection example, 47
CIO Area, 79
CPU Bus Unit Area allocations, 269
allocations, 44
errors, 335
1 N NT Link, 269
executing communications, 56
Host Link, 129, 279
Inner Board CIO Area allocations, 269
loopback test, 306
Inner Board error information, 255, 268
protocol macro, 161
overview, 264
Serial Communications Boards, 79, 255, 256
Setup Area allocations, 267
Serial Communications Units, 79
Status Area allocations, 270
CPU Bus Unit Area allocations
2-wire and 4-wire connections, transmission circuits, 98 1 N NT Link, 269
2-wire or 4-wire switch, 65 Host Link, 130, 280
3Z4L Laser Micrometer, 146 protocol macro, 162
connections, 636 Inner Board Area allocations
protocols, sequences, 633, 667 1 N NT Link, 269
Host Link, 129, 280
protocol macro, 161
A Status Area allocations
1 N NT Link, 270
Abort Flag, 170, 172
Host Link, 130, 280
Abort Switch, 187 protocol macro, 164
Access Error Flag, 178 cleaning, 354
Auxiliary Area CMND(490) instruction, 8
allocations
C-mode commands, 8
1 N NT Link, 268
commands
Host Link, 128, 278
CONTROLLER DATA READ 05 01, 351
protocol macro, 159
ERROR LOG CLEAR 21 023, 353
bits, 85
ERROR LOG READ 21 02, 352
communications distance
B Host Link, 26
protocol macro, 27
B500-AL001-E Link Adapter, 116
communications modes, 1
Backplanes
communications modes. See 1 N NT Link Host Link Loop-
applicable Backplanes, 24 back Test protocol macro serial communications modes
Bar Code Readers, 9 Communications Port Completion Codes, 133, 179, 292
baud rate Communications Port Enabled Flags, 133, 179, 291
Host Link, 26
Communications Port Error Flags, 133, 179, 292
protocol macro, 27
Communications Sequence No., 170, 173
Board/Unit Watchdog Timer Error Flags, 161
communications sequences, 176
communications timing, 132, 290
commands addressed to host computer, 134, 293
comparison
739
Index
740
Index
741
Index
742
Index
743
Index
744
Index
745
Index
746
Index
747
Index
STUP(237) instruction, 23
executing, 735
specifications, 735
system configuration
Host Link, 16
precautions, 91
protocol macro, 19
T
terminating resistance switch, 65
trace function
protocol macro, 31
Tracing Flag, 170, 172
troubleshooting, 312
1 N NT Link errors, 335
error codes, 350
Host Link errors, 312
protocol macro errors, 337
U
unit number switch, 67, 70
V
V500/V520 Bar Code Reader, 146
connections, 622
protocols
sequences, 621, 631
V600/V620 ID Controller, 146
connections, 691
protocols
sequences, 689, 725
Visual Inspection System
connections, 671
protocols
sequences, 669, 687
Visual Inspection Units, 146
W
weight, 24, 25
wiring
connectors, 118
precautions, 95
RS-232C ports, 114
RS-422A/485 ports, 116
748
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
1 February 1999 Original production
2 April 2000 Changes were made on the following pages.
Page 4: “Boards” corrected to “Unit” in “Connectable Devices.”
Pages 23-24: Information on 1: N NT link added.
Page 29: “1694” corrected to “1699” in “Unit No. 7” row of table on right.
Page 31: “RS-422” changed to “RS-422A” in “Connections.”
Page 33: Information on NT link changed.
Pages 41-42: Information about high-speed NT link added.
Page 50: Information on NT link removed from “Note 4.”
Page 97: “1694” corrected to “1699” in “Unit No. 7” row.
Page 118: “Note 3” removed from bottom right box in table. Information on RS/CS flow
added.
Page 138: Note added.
Page 151: Information on D32001 added. Information on high-speed NT link added.
Page 154: Information on baud rate and note added.
Page 163: “Execution error” changed to “syntax error” in table.
Page 171: Information added to “cause” column.
Page 347, 348, 349, 350, 352, 353, 358: “Negative sign” information changed.
3 May 2001 CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit added, “CS1” changed to “CS” or CS/CJ”
according to context, and “CS Series only” added to distinguish functions for Serial Com-
munications Boards.
Page xiv: Added terminal block precaution, section name changed to “this manual,”
change precaution on locking devices, and precaution added on terminal blocks.
Pages 105 and 114: Note added on retry processing.
Pages 171 and 181: Information added on retry processing.
04 April 2002 CJ1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit and information on the Simple Backup Func-
tion added. The CS1W-SCB21-V1, CS1W-SCB41-V1, CS1W-SCU21-V1, and CJ1W-
SCB21/41 support this function.
Page xix: “EMC” changed to “EMS.”
Page 5: Overview of the “-V1” upgrades.
Pages 21 and 22: Added CS1-H CPU Units, CJ1-H CPU Units, and Simple Backup Func-
tion to Specifications.
Page 32: Simple Backup Function added to table.
Page 149: Modified the Error Flag’s ON conditions.
Pages 158 to 161: Simple Backup Function description added.
Pages 177 and 179: Added Indicator Displays related to the protocol data restore opera-
tion.
Pages 205 to 207: Added Board/Unit replacement procedure that uses the Simple
Backup Function to restore protocol data in the new Board/Unit.
05 June 2003 Front cover: “21” inserted in model number.
Page 142: Minor changes made to first table.
Page 144: Changes made to first table row in several places.
Page 152: Line added before notes.
749
Revision History
750
Revision History
751
Revision History
752